M007-OnW-ARC-SPE-11303-V1.0 - (Msheireb Station, Finishes Materials and Structural Works Specifications, P1.2 Secondary Shelters De)

Doha Metro
Major Stations
Msheireb and Education City
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contract No: RTC/193/2016
MSHEIREB STATION,
FINISHES MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS,
P1.2 SECONDARY SHELTERS DETAIL DESIGN
SUBMITTAL REASON: ISSUED FOR SONO
DESIGN PHASE: P1.2 DETAIL DESIGN
DOCUMENT CODE NO. M007-ONW-ARC-SPE -11303
REVISION HISTORY& INTERNAL APPROVAL

Ver. No Description of revision Date Prepared Checked Approved
1 Issued for SONO 18.10.2016 S. S. G.

Antonelli Cornegliani De Carli
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SECTION 01 11 05 - SUMMARY OF WORKS .................................................................................. 5
1.1 PART 1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ................................................................................................ 6
1.3 PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED ............................................................................................... 6
2 SECTION 01 31 05 - PROJECT COORDINATION ............................................................................... 7
2.1 PART 1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 7
2.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ................................................................................................ 8
2.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 8
3 SECTION 01 32 05 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE......................................................... 15
3.1 PART 1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ............................................................................................... 16
3.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 16
4 SECTION 01 35 05 - HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.......................................................... 19
4.1 PART 1: GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 19
4.2 PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED .............................................................................................. 21
4.3 PART 3: EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 21
5 SECTION 01 35 10 - SECURITY PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 28
5.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 28
5.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED .............................................................................................. 29
5.3 PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED ............................................................................................. 29
6 SECTION 01 43 05 - QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................... 30
6.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 30
6.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 32
7 SECTION 01 51 05 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES ................................................................................. 36
7.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 36
7.3 PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED ............................................................................................. 39
8 SECTION 01 58 13 - PROJECT SITE SIGNAGE ................................................................................ 40
8.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 40
8.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 40
8.3 PART 3 EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE ................................................................................ 41
9 SECTION 01 61 05 - COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 42
9.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 42
9.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 49
9.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 50
10 SECTION 01 73 05 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................. 53
10.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 53
10.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 56
10.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 56
Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

M007-ONW-ARC-SPE-11303 Status:Issued for SONO VERSION 1
2 / 307
11 SECTION 01 74 05 - CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT ....................................................... 64
11.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 64
11.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 68
11.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 69
12 SECTION 01 78 05 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ............................................................................... 71
12.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 71
12.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 72
13 SECTION 01 79 05 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ............................................................... 77
13.1 PART 1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 77
13.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 78
14 SECTION 01 91 13 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ............................................. 81
14.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 81
14.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 84
14.3 PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 85
15 SECTION 04 42 10 - NATURAL STONE CLADDING ....................................................................... 90
15.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 90
15.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................ 95
15.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 97
16 SECTION 05 12 05 - STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK ......................................................................... 100
16.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 100
16.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 111
16.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 125
17 SECTION 05 73 05 - EXTERIOR GLASS - BALUSTRADE GLAZING .................................................. 143
17.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 143
17.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 150
18 SECTION 05 75 10 - SATIN FINISH STAINLESS STEEL ................................................................... 154
18.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 154
18.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 160
18.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 163
19 SECTION 07 62 10 - STAINLESS STEEL FLASHING - ELEVATOR .................................................... 165
19.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 165
19.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 171
19.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 172
20. SECTION 08 11 05 - METAL SCREEN ........................................................................................... 174
20.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 174
20.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 181
20.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 183
21 SECTION 08 44 10 - EXTERIOR GLASS - ELEVATOR - TYPE 1 ........................................................ 185
21.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 185
21.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 193
21.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 198
22 SECTION 08 44 10 - EXTERIOR GLASS - ELEVATOR - TYPE 2 ........................................................ 201
22.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 201
3 / 318
22.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 209
22.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 213
23 SECTION 08 44 15 - SUBSTRUCTURE GLAZING SYSTEM - ELEVATOR ......................................... 216
23.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 216
23.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 222
23.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 225
24 SECTION 08 44 15 - SUB-STRUCTURE GLAZING SYSTEM - CANOPY ........................................... 228
24.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 228
24.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 234
24.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 237
25 SECTION 08 44 45 - EXTERIOR GLASS - CANOPY ........................................................................ 240
25.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 240
25.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 248
25.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 250
26 SECTION 08 44 45 - EXTERIOR GLASS - ELEVATOR CANOPY ....................................................... 253
26.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 253
26.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 261
26.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 263
27 SECTION 26 50 05 - LIGHTING ................................................................................................... 266
27.1 PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 266
27.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 274
27.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 276
28 SECTION 10 82 15 - EXTERNAL GRILLS ..................................................................................... 280
28.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 280
28.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 285
29 SECTION 32 14 05 - EXTERNAL NATURAL STONE FLOOR .......................................................... 288
29.1 PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 288
29.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 294
29.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 297
30 SECTION 32 16 15 - STONE CURB .............................................................................................. 301
30.1 PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 301
30.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 307
30.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 308
31 SECTION 32 39 10 - BOLLARDS ................................................................................................ 310
31.1 PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 310
31.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 315
31.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 317

4 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 SECTION 01 11 05 - SUMMARY OF WORKS
1.1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
This Project consists of the construction of Doha Underground Major Stations - Mshereib and
Education City.
1.1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
Form & Conditions of Contract are per Division 00.
1.1.3 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.
B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.
B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:
1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by

code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit
routes are temporarily altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
C. Time Restrictions:
1. Limit conduct of noisy operations (those resulting in peak or continuous

pressure levels of 60dBA or above, as measured on any site boundary), to the
hours of 08:00 - 20:00.
1.1.5 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS
A. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all
contracts.
B. Section 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
C. Section 01 32 05 - Construction Progress Schedule.
D. Section 01 35 05 - Health & Safety Requirements.

5 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Section 01 35 10 - Security Procedures.
F. Section 01 43 05- Quality assurance.
G. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities.
H. Section 01 58 13 - Temporary Project Signage.
I. Section 01 61 05 - Common product requirements.
L. Section 01 73 05 - Execution.
M. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.
1.1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,
they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
ABM Architectural Branding Manual

ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BS British Standards
DIN Deutsche Institute for Standardization (Normung)
GSAS Global Sustainability Assessment System
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LEED Leadershio in Energy and Enviromental Design
NCS Natural Colour System
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
QCS Qatar Construction Specifications
1.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
1.3 PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION

6 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 SECTION 01 31 05 - PROJECT COORDINATION
2.1 PART 1 GENERAL
2.1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Site mobilization meeting.
C. Progress meetings.
D. Construction progress schedule.
E. Progress photographs.
F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
G. Number of copies of submittals.
H. Submittal procedures.
2.1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
2.1.2.1 Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or whats equivalent in

latest version:
A. Section 1 Part 6 Project Meetings
B. Section 1 Part 17 Project Co-ordination
2.1.2.2 Related Sections
A. Section 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
B. Section 01 32 05 - Construction Progress Schedule.
C. Section 01 73 05 - Execution.
D. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.
E. Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements.

7 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3 PART 3 EXECUTION
2.3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Engineer.
3. Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Engineer.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,
applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract
closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
8. Scheduling activities of a Geotechnical Engineer.
D. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to
participants, with email copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected
by decisions made.
2.3.2 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
A. Engineer will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Engineer.
4. Contractor's Superintendent.
5. Major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda:
1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

8 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to completion.

3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
5. Survey and building layout.
6. Security and housekeeping procedures.
7. Schedules.
8. Application for payment procedures.
9. Procedures for testing.
10. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
11. Requirements for start-up of equipment.
12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction
period.
D. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to
by decisions made.
2.3.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Contractor to schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at

maximum monthly intervals.
B. Contractor to make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for
participants, preside at meetings.
C. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Engineer.
4. Contractor's Superintendent.
5. Major Subcontractors.
D. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.

9 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to
by decisions made.
2.3.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining
planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for
remainder of Work.
B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule

within 10 days.
C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed

complete schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted
proposed schedule.
D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
2.3.5 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days
prior to submission of application for payment.
B. Maintain one set of all photographs at project site for reference; same copies as
submitted, identified as such.
C. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.
D. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work

produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Engineer.
E. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following

events:
1. Completion of site clearing.

2. Excavations in progress.
3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.
4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.
5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.
6. Final completion, minimum of 100 photos.

10 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. Views:
1. Consult with Engineer for instructions on views required.

2. Provide factual presentation.
3. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum
depth of field, and minimum distortion.
4. Point of View Sketch: Provide sketches identifying point of view of each
photograph either as an overlay on an existing drawing or as a dedicated
document in any format A4 to A1.
G. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG

format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software.
1. Delivery Medium: CD or DVD disk.

2. File Naming to a format approved by the Engineer: Include project
identification, date and time of view, and view identification.
3. Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each
electronic submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file
name.
4. Disk(s): Provide 1 copy including all photos cumulative to date , with files
organized in separate folders by date taken.
5. Hard Copy: Printed hardcopy in full colour and minimum size A5, of each
photograph and in B/W any size A4 to A1, for each point of view sketch.
2.3.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
5. Other types as indicated in this specification.
B. Submit to Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance
with the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetics, color and finish.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in
Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.
2.3.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

11 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
B. Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action

will be taken.
2.3.8 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project
closeout:
1. Project record documents.

2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
2.3.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Shop Drawing Procedures:
1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by

interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related Work.
2. Generic, non-project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not
meet the requirements for shop drawings.
3. The Model shall be developed using Building information Modeling (BIM)
supplemented with Computer Aided Design (CAD) content as necessary to
produce a complete set of construction Documents ( BIM Format and version
as determined byCustomer )
B. Form & Format:
1. Transmit each submittal other than drawings with a correctly filled Submittal
Form in Engineer Approved format.
2. Enclose one correctly filled Transmittal Form in Engineer Approved Format
with each transmission of single or multiple submittals.

12 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Sequentially number Transmittals / Transmittal Forms, to a numbering system

approved by the Engineer.
4. Each Transmittal Form is to correctly list all submittals transmitted therewith
and for each submittal:
a. Full Submittal Numbers with all prefixes and suffixes.
b. Description/title.
c. Change control or revision letter or number.
d. Indication as to whether a submittal form is provided, by 'Y/N', 'X', tickbox
or similar.
5. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier, on each Transmittal
Form.
6. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; primary pertinent
drawing number/s, and specification section number/s, as appropriate, on
each Submittal Form.
7. Uniquely number each Submittal to a numbering system approved by the
Engineer.
8. Submittal Numbers are to identically match the relevant related document or
drawing numbers, insofar as practicable.
9. Each transmission of submittals is to include a CD or DVD disk indelibly
marked with the project title, originating organization and transmittal number
and containing:
a. PDF version or PDF scans in format/size per the hardcopy, of:
1) The transmittal form.
2) Each submittal form.
3) Each submitted document and drawing.
b. Originating filetype softcopies of any relevant type referred to in other
specification sections or specifically requested by the Engineer, such as
'DWG'.
C. Delivery & Review:
1. Deliver submittals to Engineer at the last business address notified to

Contractor by the Engineer.
2. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of
related items.
D. Other Provisions & Requirements:
1. Apply to each submitted document, or to each submittal form for materials

submittals; Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that Contractor
review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent
construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Identify in submitted drawings and documents, variations from Contract
Document requirements and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
3. Provide space on each submitted document & drawing, or on each submittal
form for materials submittals; for Contractor and Engineer review stamps.
4. When revised for resubmission, identify on each submitted document &
drawing, or on each submittal form for materials submittals, all changes made
since previous submission.

13 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Contractor to distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate & instruct parties to

promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.
6. Submittals not requested may not be recognized or processed and/or may be
returned unreviewed.
END OF SECTION

14 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 SECTION 01 32 05 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS

SCHEDULE
3.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preliminary schedule.
B. Construction progress schedule, with network analysis diagrams and reports.
3.1.2.1 Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or whats

equivalent in latest version:
A. Section 1 Part 6 Project Meetings
B. Section 1 Part 17 Project Co-ordination
B. Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY: Work sequence.
3.1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining

planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for
remainder of Work.
B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule

within 10 days.
C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed

complete schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted
proposed schedule.
D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.

15 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Scheduler: Contractor's personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling

with 5 years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable
to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic
printout within 48 hours of request.
3.1.5 SCHEDULE FORMAT
Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each
activity with the applicable specification section number.
3.3.1 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
3.3.2 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and
completion of each element of construction.
B. Identify each item by specification section number.
C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
D. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule.
E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of

Work completed, as of the first day of each month.
F. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and
samples, owner-furnished products, Products identified under Allowances, and
dates reviewed submittals will be required from Engineer. Indicate decision dates
for selection of finishes.
G. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.
3.3.3 BAR CHARTS
A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.

16 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Identify the first work day of each week.
3.3.4 NETWORK ANALYSIS
A. Prepare network analysis diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using

the Critical Path Method.
B. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of work; how start
of a given activity depends on completion of preceding activities, and how
completion of the activity may restrain start of subsequent activities.
C. Mathematical Analysis: Tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams, using

calendar dates, and identify for each activity:
1. Preceding and following event numbers.

2. Activity description.
3. Estimated duration of activity, in maximum 15 day intervals.
4. Earliest start date.
5. Earliest finish date.
6. Actual start date.
7. Actual finish date.
8. Latest start date.
9. Latest finish date.
10. Total and free float; float time shall accrue to Owner and to Owner's benefit.
11. Monetary value of activity, keyed to Schedule of Values.
12. Percentage of activity completed.
13. Responsibility.
D. Analysis Program: Capable of compiling monetary value of completed and partially

completed activities, accepting revised completion dates, and recomputation of all
dates and float.
E. Required Reports: List activities in sorts or groups:
1. By preceding work item or event number from lowest to highest.

2. By amount of float, then in order of early start.
3.3.5 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE
A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Contractor at each

submittal.
B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of
schedule.
C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

17 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.3.6 UPDATING SCHEDULE
A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date
of each activity.
C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and
other identifiable changes.
E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on
the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including
the effects of changes on schedules of separate contractors.
3.3.7 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE
A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to

Subcontractors, suppliers, Engineer, Owner, and other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections

shown in schedules.
END OF SECTION

18 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 SECTION 01 35 05 - HEALTH AND SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS
4.1 PART 1: GENERAL
Occupational Health & Safety requirements.

A. Section 1 Part 10 Health and safety
B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary.
C. Section 01 35 10 - Security Procedures.
D. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities.
4.1.3 SAFETY PROGRAM
A. Comply with all applicable requirements of the Owners Construction Safety Manual
including work permit procedures for confined space entry, cold work, hot work and
release of hazardous liquids or gasses.
B. Employ a qualified Safety engineer whose sole responsibility shall be to administer

and enforce the Safety program and to monitor and identify potential safety risks.
C. Prepare and submit Safety program at project mobilization for review and approval
by the Owner.
D. Maintain the Safety program throughout the construction period.
E. The Contractor's Safety program shall follow the format:
1. Practices and Procedures.

2. Safety awareness.
3. Safety program enforcement.

19 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Fire prevention and protection.

5. Occupational health.
6. Emergency planning.
F. Ensure that all supervisory personnel understand the requirements of the Project
Safety Program.
4.1.4 EMERGENCY PLANNING
A. Establish evacuation procedures to be followed in the event of a large-scale

emergency. Procedures shall cover:
1. Requirement for site personnel to assemble in designated locations by

subcontract or any other means of quick identification.
2. The person responsible for administering the log, which records visitors to the
site, shall account for visitors.
B. The person or persons responsible for raising the alarm shall make
himself/themselves known to a responsible member of the site organisation.
He/they shall be kept available to inform responsible organisations of the exact
location(s) of the emergency and to describe the cause of any emergency.
C. Provide alternative means of escape available from each floor of the building to
facilitate evacuation.
D. A manually operated alarm system shall be set up to signal to evacuate the site.
E. Manually operated sirens shall be positioned at every third floor in order that the
alarm can be raised locally.
F. Staff shall be instructed on how to act when the alarm sounds, for example:
1. Switch-off/disconnect any equipment currently in use (except those which

constitute a means of escape).
2. Ensure that all personnel in the vicinity are aware of the alarm.
3. Move calmly to the designated area.
4. Remain in the designated area until such time as a head count is completed.
4.1.5 SECURITY EVACUATION
A. Establish procedures for efficient evacuation of all personnel from the area, to be
followed in the event of an external security situation arising which affects their
safety or well-being. Ensure that procedures account for all employees and those of
subcontractors, whether at the project site, accommodation locations or at other
identifiable locations.

20 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Maintain sufficient transportation in good working order for evacuation of all

employees and those of subcontractors, whether at the project site, at
accommodation locations or other identifiable locations.
4.2 PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED
4.3 PART 3: EXECUTION
4.3.1 SAFETY PROGRAM ENFORCEMENT
A. Ensure that safe construction practices are utilised and that such practices are in
accordance with accepted procedures.
B. Section foremen answering to site superintendents shall be responsible for

ensuring that their workmen wear suitable protective clothing.
C. Safety walk-throughs of all areas of the project shall be conducted with the
Engineer on a regular basis. A Safety walk-through report shall be prepared
identifying non-compliances with the Safety program and any other safety hazards
for immediate action.
D. Ultimate responsibility for safety matters shall lie with the Contractor.
4.3.2 PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES
A. Visitors to the site (those not occupied on a full time basis on site), shall be required
to comply with all safety requirements specified herein.
B. First Aid and Medical Treatment:
1. First aid facilities shall be provided on site sufficient for initial treatment in the
event of accident.
2. Maintain a purpose-constructed facility for first aid and primary treatment in
the event of injury to Contractors, subcontractors, Engineers and Owners
personnel and visitors. Clearly identify the location of the facility on the site.
The facility shall be equipped with all necessary equipment and consumables
required to treat the range of physical injuries which could occur during the
course of the Works.
3. Employ a certified nurse or health care practitioner capable of administering
first aid and primary medical treatment throughout the construction period.
4. Maintain a properly equipped ambulance in ready condition with driver
available for emergency transportation of injured personnel from the project
site to Hospital, 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, throughout the
construction period.
5. The telephone number of hospital or other facility suitable for the treatment of
serious accidents or injuries shall be displayed prominently.
6. All personnel shall be required to report all accidents, no matter how minor, to
a designated safety representative. The responsible person shall be required
to complete an accident report form.

21 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Notify the Engineer & relevant jurisdictional authorities in writing, within one day of
occurrences during the project, involving accidental fire and/or resulting in:
1. Death
2. Loss of Consciousness
3. One or More Days Away from Work
4. Restrictions on Work
5. Job Transfer or Essential Job Functions Affected
6. Significant Injury, Illness or Disability as Diagnosed by a Physician or likely to
be so diagnosed where no Physician examination was performed, eg.
Asbestosis, Fracture, Perforated Eardrum.
7. Medical Treatment beyond First Aid as defined by US CFR Title 29 Subpart
1904.7.
4.3.3 SAFETY AWARENESS
A. Safety awareness shall be promulgated by means of notices placed in strategic

locations around the site and through regular safety meetings. All employees shall
be informed of the various safety procedures that must be followed.
B. Safety notices distributed around the site shall be in Arabic and English language
shall be posted in strategic locations and shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
1. "No Smoking".
2. "Hard Hat Area.
3. "Danger: Construction Site, Do Not Enter".
4. "Goods Lift Only".
5. "Authorised Personnel Only"
6. "Caution Inflammable Material"
C. The operating procedures of personnel elevators and cranes shall be displayed

prominently and only personnel trained in their use shall be permitted to operate
such machinery.
D. Weekly tool box safety meetings shall be held by foremen to review safety issues.
E. The Contractor shall impose sanctions on any employee who fails to follow the
prescribed safety program requirements. If the number of recorded incidents of
non-compliance is high, the Contractor shall impose sanctions at the supervisory
and site management level. Should this not be enforced effectively, the Engineer
may impose appropriate sanctions.
4.3.4 FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION
A. In the event of fire, priority shall be given to ensuring egress of personnel over
extinguishing of fires. After evacuation, containment shall become the prime
consideration until such time as the alarm has been transmitted to the fire
department and they arrive on site.

22 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Fire extinguishers will be distributed around the Site in strategic locations and shall
be of the type relevant to the particular adjacent hazard. Personnel shall be trained
in their proper operation. A suitable maintenance program shall be developed to
ensure that the extinguishers operate properly.
C. The use of flammable items, or items likely to pose a fire hazard, shall be kept to a
minimum. Procedures shall be generated for handling specific materials.
D. Waste materials shall be collected into one central location and disposed of
regularly to reduce potential fire hazards. Flammable material shall be stored
outside buildings in suitable stores/containers.
E. Fire watchmen shall be employed full time to watch and attend all works involving
burning, welding, cutting and grinding and any other work which may generate heat
or sparks.
F. In the event of a fire, a designated person shall ensure that the fire department
authorities have been alerted and that authorised visitors to site have knowledge of
the fire and that no one attempts to enter affected parts of the site.
G. The telephone number of the fire department shall be prominently displayed.
H. Personnel shall be instructed on how to deal with outbreaks of fire that can easily
be contained with the means available.
I. Adequate ventilation shall be provided in those areas where flammable materials

are to be applied. Smoking shall not be permitted. Spark free equipment shall be
utilised and open flames prohibited.
J. If volatile fluid wastes occur during the construction process, they shall be disposed
of fully in accordance with methods approved by the local authorities.
K. Emergency exit paths shall be maintained clear of all obstructions and well
illuminated.
L. Tarpaulins and polyethylene sheets, if used, shall be fire resistant.
M. Contractor shall ensure that the integrity of the building structure in respect of fire is
maintained during construction.
N. Care shall be taken to ensure that following trades do not damage fire safety
separations.
4.3.5 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Inform all employees as to the necessity for protective clothing, particularly when
carrying out potentially dangerous operations (e.g. welding).

23 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Protective equipment shall be worn by all employees and visitors as necessary.

Provide the following safety clothing and equipment:
1. Suitable clothing for all operations personnel, to be worn at all times.

2. Safety helmets, safety glasses and safety work shoes for all personnel, to be
worn at all times, per US CFR Title 29 Subparts 1910.33, 1910.35 & 1910.36.
3. Appropriate eye/face protection to be worn when exposed to excessive dust,
flying objects, chemicals, sparks or harmful rays, per US CFR Title 29
Subparts 1910.33 & 1910.34.
4. Gloves to be worn when handling objects which could cut, tear or burn.
5. Hearing protection to be worn per US CFR Title 29 Subparts 1926.52 &
1926.101.
6. Disposable protective overalls, head covering, foot protection and gloves to be
worn by personnel employed on demolition and removal of asbestos
materials.
7. Safety nets to be properly deployed to adequately protect workers.
8. Body harnesses to be suitable for the work being performed.
9. Self-contained breathing apparatus to be used where work involves likelihood
of exposure to toxic or hazardous fumes, vapours, gases, dust, asbestos or
other hazardous fibres.
C. Safety goggles shall be worn by personnel operating electric saws, planes, sanders
and grinders.
4.3.6 MATERIALS
A. Store & handle materials so as not to create a hazard e.g.:
1. Materials shall not block exits.

2. Pipe, conduit and similar materials shall be stored in a manner which prevents
movement of the material.
3. Material storage on scaffolding shall be minimized.
4. Rubbish chutes shall be used for disposing of materials from high level.
4.3.7 TOOL AND EQUIPMENT USE
A. Do not permit personnel to operate small hand tools requiring power without
suitable electrical connections (i.e. suitably grounded plugs are to be used and
loose wires wedged into position shall not be permitted).
B. Do not use electrically operated tools in areas where it would be hazardous (e.g.
areas where there may be standing water).
C. Do not carry out welding in the vicinity of flammable materials.
D. If laser equipment is used, adequate precautions shall be adopted to protect the

eyesight of personnel in the area.

24 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Welders shall be skilled and know the basic safety principles applicable to the
storage of gases and of welding in confined spaces. For welding operations,
welders shall:
1. Wear gloves and approved eye protection with suitable filters.

2. Check for the proximity of flammable materials prior to any welding operation.
3. Check that welding equipment and wiring thereto is in good condition prior to
commencing welding operations.
4. Ensure that gas containers are secured in trolleys.
4.3.8 PLANT AND VEHICLE USE
A. Cranes, hoists and other plant items shall be well maintained and operated only by
personnel properly trained in their use, in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions and standards. Installation of tower cranes shall be subject to the
following:
1. A pre-erection/dismantling meeting shall be conducted with the crane

manufacturers/suppliers representative, to be attended by all personnel
associated with the work to thoroughly review the manufacturers erection
procedure.
2. A pre-erection inspection of all components shall be carried out to ensure the
following:
a. All bolts and pins to be used in erection of cranes shall be new. Any used
or damaged bolts and pins shall be replaced with new.
b. All structural members shall be straight and free from bends, dents,
cracks in welds, etc.
c. Wire ropes and pendants shall be in good condition without broken wires,
worn sheaves or bearings.
d. Gear boxes shall be in good condition and free of broken or shipped cog
teeth, accumulation of dirt, etc.
e. Suitable lubricants shall be applied to all appropriate parts, prior to
installation.
B. Do not permit use of vehicles or plant in a manner which could be construed as

dangerous e.g.
1. Passengers shall not be permitted to ride on vehicles, except in seating

designed by the vehicle manufacturer for personnel transportation.
Transportation of passengers on bumpers, running boards, tailgates, freight
beds or in freight compartments etc., is prohibited.
2. Doors of personnel lifts or hoists shall remain closed during motion. Areas
adjacent to the lifts shall be fenced off.
3. The maximum carrying capacity of lifts shall be prominently displayed.
4. Chains, ropes, etc. shall be properly maintained and regularly checked.
4.3.9 TEMPORARY WORKS AND CIRCULATION & FALL PROTECTION
A. Brace and shore masonry walls as necessary during construction to maintain their
integrity.

25 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Design scaffolding, formwork and other temporary works to suitable standards with
adequate margins of safety.
C. Scaffolding shall have adequate working boards and shall be erected, modified or
dismantled only by qualified personnel. Scaffolding shall be tagged and inspected
at regular intervals to assess and ensure that it is safe for use. Scaffolding shall be
wide enough to allow employees to walk safely and shall be provided with toe
boards and guard rails if the height is 2 meters and above from ground level.
D. Ladders shall be secured and shall rise no more than 4m without platforms.
Ladders shall be higher by 1 meter above landings and platforms. The angle of
repose of ladders shall be not less than 75 degrees.
E. Keep exit passages and stairs free of pits, holes or protruding objects.
F. Provide suitable barriers and/or handrails around all internal openings perimeters to
prevent falls.
G. Properly deploy and maintain safety nets.
4.3.10 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY & HAZARDS
A. Environmental hazards which may affect site personnel shall be minimised

including, but not limited to the following:
1. Chemical - liquids, paints, dusts, fumes, etc.: Provide protection to site staff
from the danger posed by such substances by means of face masks or self-
contained breathing apparatus when required. In the event of any additional
hazard (such as installation of wet batteries) further protective clothing shall be
worn and additional protective measures shall be taken. Adequate ventilation
shall be provided. Solvents shall, as far as possible, be non-toxic and non-
flammable.
2. Physical - radiation, noise, pressure, etc.: Provide earplugs and ensure that
they are worn when necessary.
3. Biological - viruses, bacteria, fungi and insects.: Establish a vermin control
program.
B. Carry out work on demolition, removal, transportation and disposal of asbestos

materials, polychloride biphenyls (pcbs) and other hazardous materials strictly in
accordance with the Owners Construction Safety Manual and other statutory
requirements.
C. Prior to any work commencing, the section leader responsible for that element of
work shall assess the area concerned for potential hazards as categorised above.
D. Keep the site clear or any deleterious materials and in a neat state. Nails and other
sharp, protruding items shall not be left in positions where they would be likely to
cause injury (e.g. when stripping packing cases, etc.). Waste materials shall not be
left lying around.

26 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Inform section leaders of the need to keep working areas clear and to inform
management of anything that they consider hazardous.
F. Provide adequate lighting and ventilation.
G. Eating places shall be maintained within the Contractor's control, which shall
ensure they are clean, free from harmful levels of dust, smoke, fumes, pollution or
contamination. Contractor shall be responsible for the cleanliness of eating areas.
END OF SECTION

27 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 SECTION 01 35 10 - SECURITY PROCEDURES
5.1 PART 1 GENERAL
Security measures including formal security program, entry control, personnel identification,
guard service, and miscellaneous restrictions.
5.1.2 REFERENCESTANDARD

A. Section 1 Part 4 Protection
B. Section 1 Part 5 interference
C. Section 1 Part 6 Project meetings
D. Section 1 Part 14 Temporary works and Equipment
E. Section 1 Part 15 Temporary control
B. Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY.
C. Section 01 35 05 - Health & Safety Requirements
D. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities.
5.1.3 SECURITY PROGRAM
A. Protect Work and Owner's operations from fire, theft, vandalism, and unauthorized
entry.
B. Initiate program at project mobilization.
C. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy.
5.1.4 ENTRY CONTROL

28 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities.
B. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification.
C. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request.
5.1.5 PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification badge to each person authorized to enter premises.
B. Badge To Include: Personal photograph, name, assigned number, expiration date

and employer.
C. Maintain a list of accredited persons, submit copy to Owner on request.
D. Require return of badges at expiration of their employment on the Work.
5.1.6 GUARD SERVICE
Employ uniformed guard service to provide watch persons at site twenty four hours a day,
seven days a week.
END OF SECTION

29 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 SECTION 01 43 05 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
6.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. Quality assurance submittals.
B. Mock-ups.
C. Control of installation.
D. Tolerances.
E. Testing and inspection services.
F. Manufacturers' field services.

A. Section 1 Part 7 Submittals
B. Section 1 Part 8 Quality assurance
C. Section 1 Part 9 Material
D. Section 1 Part 19 Regulatory requirements
B. Section 01 61 05 - Common Product Requirements.
6.1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

30 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number,
and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST
Construction Materials Reference Laboratory or authorized KSA equivalent,
during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any
deficiencies reported by the inspection.
3. Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing testing laboratory is
accredited under IAS AC89.
B. Design Data: Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator for the
limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to
Engineer and to Contractor.
1. Include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f. Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection.
h. Date of test/inspection.
i. Results of test/inspection.
j. Conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Engineer, provide interpretation of results.
2. Test report submittals are for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator
for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and
the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's
information.
D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification

by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to
Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but
must be acceptable to Engineer.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections,

submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up,
adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures,
perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria
required for application or installation.
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports:

31 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Engineer for information.

2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
6.1.4 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract

Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.
B. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
C. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the
specific work, until Substantial Completion.
D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in

Contract nor those of Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by
mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
6.1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to
perform specified testing and inspection.
B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work

in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Contractor Employed Agency:
1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543,

ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, and ASTM C1093.
2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM
E329.
3. Laboratory Qualifications: Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC89.
4. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.
5. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review
services.
6. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using
an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory
measurement quality assurance program.
7. Testing agency: Recognised laboratories GACDD.

32 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3.1 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site

conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where
more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher
standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified

quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed

by the manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
6.3.2 MOCK-UPS
A. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in
the respective product specification sections.
B. Assemble and erect mockups required by the respective specification sections,

including all specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and
finishes.
C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Engineer and is specified in product

specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction,
remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Engineer.
6.3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce

acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict

with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.

33 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in

place.
6.3.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. See individual specification sections for testing required.
B. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor
in performance of services.
3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with
specified standards.
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract
Documents.
5. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
conformance of Work or products.
6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Engineer.
7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
8. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract

Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials

proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturers' facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations
requiring testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for
additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond
specified requirements.
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and
inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

34 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be

performed by the same agency on instructions by Engineer.
F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be

paid for by Contractor.
6.3.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product

suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up
of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate
instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required

observations.
1. Observer subject to approval of Engineer.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or

installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
6.3.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work,
Engineer will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION

35 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 SECTION 01 51 05 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES
7.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities.
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E. Security requirements.
F. Waste removal facilities and services.
H. Project identification sign.
7.1.2 REFERENCE STANDARD

A. Section 1 Part 14 Temporary works and Equipment
B. Section 1 Part 15 Temporary control
C. Section 1 Part 16 Traffic diversion
D. Section 1 Part 17 Project Co-ordination
B. Section 01 35 10 - Security Procedures
C. Section 01 58 13 - Temporary Project Signage.
D. Section 01 74 05 - Cleaning and Waste management

36 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7.1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and
ventilation required for construction purposes.
B. New permanent facilities may be used.
C. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
7.1.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of
project mobilization.
B. Provide equivalent equipment and connections for Owner's field office.
C. Provide equivalent equipment and connections for Engineer's field office.
D. Telecommunications services shall include:
1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications,

with necessary software and laser printer.
2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.
3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.
4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use.
5. Facsimile Service: Minimum of one dedicated fax machine/printer, with
dedicated phone line.
6. Facsimile Service: Fax-to-email software on personal computer.
7.1.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project
mobilization.
B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
7.1.6 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent

access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for
owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from
damage from construction operations and demolition.
B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for

public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

37 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from
damage.
7.1.7 FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
B. Provide m high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian
gates with locks.
7.1.8 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate

acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and
maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections,
and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing
hardware and locks.
7.1.9 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.
7.1.10 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in
clean and orderly condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide

suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material
outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate
containers with lids.
7.1.11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings.

38 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Erect on site at location established by Engineer.
C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
7.1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of

Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 600 mm. Grade site as

indicated.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION

39 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 SECTION 01 58 13 - PROJECT SITE SIGNAGE
8.1 PART 1 - GENERAL
Section includes Project Site Signage requirements.
8.1.2 REFERENCES STANDARDS
8.1.2.1 Standards:
A. Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or whats equivalent in latest
version:
8.1.2.2 Related section

A. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
B. 01 00 00 General requirements
8.1.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit a copy of a Project Site Signage to the Engineer for his review
and approval.
8.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
8.2.1 DESCRIPTION
The Project Site Signage, review and approved by the Engineer, shall be erected at the
project site.
If changes and/or additions occurre through construction time, the Project Site Signage could
be renovated and or integrated on Engineers approval and a non-permanent sign shall
remain in place through construction.
The Project Site Signage is to be removed at substantial completion.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the Project Site Signage, for its construction, location
and installation and their costs will be charged on Contractor.
The copy on the construction sign shall include, at a minimum, the items listed below in order
of placement on the sign.
1. Official name of the building as approved by Board having authority;
2. Name and addresses of Employer;

40 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Name and addresses of Authorization Board
4. Name and addresses of the members of the design team;
5. Name and addresses of the members of the Consultants team;
6. Name and addresses of Contractors
7. Name and addresses of main sub-contractors
8. Date of initial construction;
9. Date of final completion (period of construction);
10. Render representation of the new building in finished form
11. Any other necessary information
According to the dimension of the Project Site Signage, this shall be mounted on a rigid
supporting frame or structure that shall be installed and authorized by the Engineer or other
board having authority.
Project Site Signage will be maintained in good and neat condition until the
Architect/Engineer authorizes their removal.
8.3 PART 3 EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE
END OF SECTION

41 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 SECTION 01 61 05 - COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
9.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. General Common product requirements.
B. Sustainability design-related Common product requirements.
C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
D. Product option requirements.
E. Substitution limitations and procedures.
F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

equivalent in latest version
B. Section 1 Part 8 Quality assurance
C. Section 1 Part 9 Material
D. Section 1 Part 19 Regulatory Requirements
E. Section 1 Part 22 New Technologies and innovations
B. Section 01 43 05- Quality assurance.
C. Section 01 74 05 - Cleaning and Waste management

42 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1.2.3 Qatar Civil Defence Authority ( Qcdd )

The material referred above to be accepted by Qatar Civil Defence Authority through the
material acceptance process.
The material need to have QCDD Certification from recognized testing labs:
1. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES US/CANADA

2. FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION (FM)
3. Verband der Sachversicherer, VdS
4. LOSS PREVENTION CERTIFICATION BOARD (LPCB-BRE)
5. BUREAU VERITAS / BVI
6. DET NORSKE VERITAS (DNV)
7. IFC Certification Ltd.
8. IMQ S.P.A
9. GERMANISCHER LLOYDS (GL)
10. SGS US TESTING COMPANY INC.
11. BM TRADA/CHILTERN INT'L FIRE
12. CERTIFIRE - WARRINGTON FIRE GLOBAL SAFETY
13. EXOVA WARRINGTON CERTIFICATION LIMITED (EWCL); EXOVA
WARRINGTONFIRE; EXOVA GROUP
14. CSIRO
15. INTERTEK TESTING SERVICES NA LTD
16. BSI/KITEMARK
17. MPA DRESDEN GMBH
18. TUV SUD PSB Pte Ltd.
19. TUV Rheinland GROUP
20. ANPI
21. ANPI/ANPICERT
22. BOSEC
23. BENOR ATG
24. CERTALARM
25. ANPI BE
26. APPLUS+ /LGAI
27. MPA IBMB Braunschweig
28. THOMAS BELL- WRIGHT IC
29. EFECTIS
30. DEKRA
MATERIAL ASSESSMENT SHEET TEMPLATE ( Each material wiil be submit with

complete assessment sheet template )

43 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

44 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This Material assessment sheet template is cite in GSAS requirement note.

Remainder of GSAS sheet including VOC level requirements.

45 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1.2.4 Leadership in Energy and Enviromental Design ( LEED )
Landscape and Shelters Materials
[SS Credit 7.1] Heat Island EffectNonroof

Use hardscape / External materials with an SRI of at least 29 as per ASTM Intl. Standards
[SS Credit 7.2] Heat Island EffectRoof

Use materials with an SRI of at least 78 as per ASTM Intl. Standards
[MR Credit 4] Recycled Content.

a) Use materials with recycled content at least 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total value
of the materials in the project.
b) Materials shall be labeled as per International Standard ISO 140211999, Environmental
Labels and DeclarationsSelf-Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental
Labelling).
[MR Credit 5] Regional Materials.

Use building materials or products that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for a minimum of 10% or 20%, based on cost, of
the total materials value.
[MR Credit 7] Certified Wood.

Use a minimum of 50% (based on cost) of wood-based materials and products that are certified in
accordance with the Forest Stewardship Councils principles and criteria, for wood building
components.
Required Documents
1) Manufacturers data showing the Materials SRI value, & manufacturer.
2) product names, manufacturers names, costs, percentage postconsumer content, and
percentage preconsumer content.
3) list of actual materials costs, excluding labor and equipment for CSI Division 0310, 31
(Section 31.60.00 Foundations) and 32 (Sections 32.10.00 Paving, 32.30.00 Site
Improvements, and 32.90.00 Planting) only; including Division 12 is optional.
4) cutsheets or manufacturers letters to document the listed products recycled content.
5) list of product purchases manufactured, extracted, or harvested regionally.
6) List of distances between the project and manufacturer,and distances between the project and
the extraction site.
7) cutsheets that document material origin and manufacture within a 500-mile radius of the project
site.
8) FSC certifications for all FSC certified wood products.
9) List of all new wood products (not reclaimed, salvaged, or recycled) on the project and
identifying which components are FSC certified and the cost of all new wood products as well.

46 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internal Finishing Materials

c) Use materials with recycled content at least 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total value
d) Materials shall be labeled as per International Standard ISO 140211999, Environmental
Labelling).


components.
[IEQ Credit 4.1] Low-Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants.

a) Adhesives, Sealants and Sealant Primers Volatile organic compound (VOC) Limits must
comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.
b) Aerosol Adhesives must comply with Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-
36 requirements in effect on October 19, 2000.
[IEQ Credit 4.2] Low-Emitting Materials Paints & Coatings.

Paints and coatings used on the interior of the building must comply with the following criteria as
applicable to the project scope:
a) Architectural paints and coatings applied to interior walls and ceilings must not exceed the
volatile organic compound (VOC) content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS-11,
Paints, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993.
b) Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates must not
exceed the VOC content limit of 250 g/L established in Green Seal Standard GC-03, Anti-
Corrosive Paints, 2nd Edition, January 7, 1997.
c) Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs applied to interior
elements must not exceed the VOC content limits established in South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on
January 1, 2004.
[IEQ Credit 4.3] Low-Emitting Materials Flooring Systems.
Flooring systems must comply with one of the following options:
OPTION 1
All flooring must comply with the following as applicable to the project scope:
a) All carpet & carpet cushion installed in the building interior must meet the testing and
product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus program.
b) All hard surface flooring must be certified as compliant with the FloorScore standard -

47 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 1350, developed by the California Department of Health by an independent third-

party.
c) Flooring products covered by FloorScore include vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood
flooring, ceramic flooring, rubber flooring and wall base.
d) An alternative compliance path using FloorScore is acceptable for credit achievement:
100% of the non-carpet finished flooring must be FloorScore-certified and must constitute
at least 25% of the finished floor area.
e) Concrete, wood, bamboo and cork floor finishes such as sealer, stain and finish must meet
the requirements of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113,
Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004.
OPTION 2
All flooring elements installed in the building interior must meet the testing and product
Requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda.
[IEQ Credit 4.4] Low-Emitting Materials Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products.
Composite wood and agrifiber products used on the interior of the building must contain no added
urea-formaldehyde resins. Laminating adhesives used to fabricate on-site and shop-applied
composite wood and agrifiber assemblies must not contain added urea-formaldehyde resins.
Required documents

site.
9) list of each indoor aerosol adhesive product, sealants and sealant primers used on a project.
Include the manufacturers name, product name, and specific VOC data (g/L, less water) for
each product, as well as the corresponding allowable VOC from the referenced standard.
10) list of each indoor paint and coating product used. Include the manufacturers name, product
name, and specific VOC data (in g/L, less water) for each product, as well as the corresponding
allowable VOC from the referenced standard.
11) list of each carpet, carpet cushion, and carpet adhesive installed in the building interior.
12) Products Data sheets show the VOC content for each
13) list of each hard surface flooring product, tile setting adhesive, finishes, and grout installed in
the building interior
14) Products Data sheets show the VOC content for each tile setting adhesive and grout.
15) list of each composite wood and agrifiber product installed in the building interior.
16) Products Data sheets confirm that each product does not contain any added urea-
formaldehyde.

48 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1.2.5 Public Facility Items
[WE Prerequisite 1] Water Use Reduction.

Use fixtures which the aggregate of all use 20% less water than the water use baseline calculated
for the building (not including irrigation).
Calculate the baseline according to the following:
Toilets:1.6 gallons per flush (gpf).

Urinals 1.0 (gpf).
Lavatory (restroom) faucets: 0.5 (gpm) at 60 (psi).
9.1.2.6 Required Documents

1) Manufacturers data showing the water consumption rates, manufacturer, and model of each
fixture and fitting.
9.1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark

each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this
Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and
electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility
outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product,

with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for
interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
9.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
9.2.1 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract

Documents.
B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.

2. Containing lead, cadmium, asbestos.

49 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:
1. Have low VOC content and emissions.

2. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the
project.
3. Have longer documented life span under normal use.
4. Result in less construction waste.
5. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable.
6. Are made of recycled materials.
7. If made of wood, are made of sustainably harvested wood, wood chips, or
wood fiber.
8. Are Cradle-to-Cradle Certified.
9. Have a published Environmental Product Declaration (EPD).
10. Have a published Health Product Declaration (HPD).
11. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis.
9.2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any

product meeting those standards or description, from a manufacturer, supplier or
contractor listed under the relevant specification section number, in document
'Appendix A'. Submit a request for substitution, for any manufacturer, supplier or
contractor not listed in document 'Appendix A'.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one

of the manufacturers named or submit a request for substitution for any
manufacturer not named.
9.2.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities
specified in individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
9.3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. All references in this specification to specific products and/or manuafacturers are

basis of design only and non-exclusive. Contractor may propose alternatives of
equal or better standard, grade or quality, to be accepted or rejected as such, in
each case, by the Engineer by review of Contractor submittals.
B. Submittals are document each such proposal with complete data substantiating
compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
C. Each substitution proposal constitutes a representation that submitter:

50 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds

the quality level of the specified product.
2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified
product.
3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently
become apparent.
5. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Engineer for review or redesign services
associated with re-approval by authorities.
D. Substitutions will not be considered where acceptance would require revision to the
Contract Documents.
9.3.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment,

package to avoid loss of factory calibration.
B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on

outside of packaging.
C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to

minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and

littering of surrounding areas.
F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements,

quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.
H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where
economically feasible.
9.3.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered
according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to
minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

51 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an

environment favorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site
storage or protection.
G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations,

weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust,
and other contaminants.
H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.
I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide

ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.
J. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.
M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to

verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION

52 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 SECTION 01 73 05 - EXECUTION
10.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Pre-installation meetings.
C. Cutting and patching.
D. Surveying for laying out the work.
E. Cleaning and protection.
F. Starting of systems and equipment.
G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment

procedures.
I. General requirements for maintenance service.

A. Section 1 Part 2 Use and Maintenance of the Site
B. Section 1 Part 9 Material
C. Section 1 Part 19 Regulatory Requirements
D. Section 1 Part 20 Clearance of the site
E. Section 1 Part 21 Inspection and Handover Procedures

53 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY:
C. Section 01 43 05- Quality assurance
D. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities:
E. Section 01 74 05 - Cleaning and Waste management
F. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.
G. Section 01 79 05 - Demonstration and Training:
10.1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before
starting survey work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.

2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations
and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that
affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.

2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
6. Include in request:
a. Identification of Project.
b. Location and description of affected work.
c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.
f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.
g. Date and time work will be executed.
10.1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project
is located and acceptable to Engineer. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and
Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

54 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for
specific service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer

experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
10.1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Use of explosives is not permitted.
B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and
maintain pumping equipment.
C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to
protect site from soil erosion.
D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to

prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
E. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction
operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into
atmosphere and over adjacent property.
1. Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors.

2. Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing
to be occupied by Owner.
F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced
by construction operations. Comply with 01 10 00 Time Restrictions on noisy
operations, as defined therein.
G. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests
and insects from damaging the work.
H. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from
accessing or invading premises.
I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination

of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and
pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and
local regulations.
10.1.6 COORDINATION

55 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project
Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are
compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having
interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service,
such equipment.
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and

electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing
shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel
with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring
within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish
elements.
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of

defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize
disruption of Owner's activities.
10.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
10.2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work
for patching and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing

products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for
substitution described in Section 01 61 05 - COMMON PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS.
10.3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for
subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

56 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new

work being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication,

to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the
correct locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including

elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After
uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.
Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
10.3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or

conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
10.3.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation

meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific
section.
C. Notify Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.

2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,
with two copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions
made.
10.3.4 LAYING OUT THE WORK

57 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.
E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent
reference points during construction.
F. Promptly report to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or

relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no
changes without prior written notice to Engineer.
H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
I. Contractor to establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site,

referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and
vertical data, on project record documents.
J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and
similar appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil
placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
K. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
10.3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to compliance with regulatory requirements, conduct construction

operations in compliance with NFPA standards, including applicable
recommendations in Appendix A.
B. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to
necessity for replacement.

58 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical
and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise

indicated.
F. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and

appearance.
10.3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.

2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize
damage and restore to original condition.
D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture
resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed
without prior approval.
F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents.
G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces.
H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction,

completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00,
to full thickness of the penetrated element.

59 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On

continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an
assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of
substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.
10.3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean
and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and
other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and
continue cleaning to eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically
and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.
10.3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity
in immediate work area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of

openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity

is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing
material manufacturer.
G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

60 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic

coverings if possible.
10.3.9 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper
lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that
may cause damage.
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with
those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and

manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide

authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve
equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing
equipment or system in operation.
G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is
functioning correctly.
10.3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
See Section 01 79 05 - Demonstration and Training.
10.3.11 ADJUSTING
Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
10.3.12 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary
labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces,
vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

61 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test
labels or nametallates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials

appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.
F. Clean filters of operating equipment.
G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area
drains, and drainage systems.
H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the
site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
10.3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be

listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for
Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.
C. Notify Engineer when work is considered ready for Engineer's Substantial

Completion inspection.
D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that

Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work
is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's
Substantial Completion inspection.
E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List
containing Engineer's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be
completed or corrected and submit to Engineer.
F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with
requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
G. Notify Engineer when work is considered finally complete and ready for Engineer's
Substantial Completion final inspection.
H. Complete items of work determined by Engineer listed in executed Certificate of

Substantial Completion.
10.3.14 MAINTENANCE

62 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not

less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the
specified warranty, whichever is longer.
C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation.

Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.
D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair

or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the
original component.
E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or

subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION

63 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11 SECTION 01 74 05 - CLEANING AND WASTE

MANAGEMENT
11.1 PART 1 GENERAL
11.1.1 1SECTION INCLUDES
This Part specifies the clearance and maintenance requirements of the Site.

A. Section 1 Part 2 Use and Maintenance of the Site
B. Section 1 Part 20 Clearance of the site
B. Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY:
C. Section 01 43 05- Quality assurance
D. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities:
E. Section 01 74 05 - Cleaning and Waste management
F. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.
G. Section 01 79 05 - Demonstration and Training:
H. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities:.
I. Section 01 61 05 - Common product requirements
L. Section 01 73 05 - Execution
11.1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

64 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste
possible.
B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to
error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.
C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste

as economically feasible.
D. Owner may decide to pay for additional recycling, salvage, and/or reuse based on
Landfill Alternatives Proposal specified below.
E. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in
landfills or by incineration:
1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.

2. Corrugated cardboard.
3. Wood pallets.
4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring.
5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps; see
Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing for use options.
6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural
steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel,
iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and
bronze.
7. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants, both new and
removed: DuPont (http://flooring.dupont.com) and Interface
(www.interfaceinc.com) conduct reclamation programs.
F. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal,
incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom
the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports.
G. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to

implement these requirements.
H. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:
1. Burning on the project site.

2. Burying on the project site.
3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.
4. Other illegal dumping or burying.
I. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying

with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local
requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste
materials.

65 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11.1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the
like.
B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building

materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction,
remodeling, repair and demolition operations.
C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility,

corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity.
D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances,

i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.
E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long

period of exposure.
F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life
cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.
G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for
remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others.
H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid

waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form.
Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.
I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.
K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale
or reuse by others.
L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or
well production run-off water.
M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate
beginning from the first time they become waste.
N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or

salvaged.

66 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its
intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable
material.
11.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Alternatives Proposal: Within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of

Award of Bid, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner,
submit a projection of trash/waste that will require disposal and alternatives to
landfilling, with net costs.
1. Submit to Engineer for Owner's review and approval.

2. If Owner wishes to implement any cost alternatives, the Contract Price will be
adjusted as specified elsewhere.
3. Include an analysis of trash/waste to be generated and landfill options as
specified for Waste Management Plan described below.
4. Describe as many alternatives to landfilling as possible:
a. List each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled.
b. List the proposed local market for each material.
c. State the estimated net cost resulting from each alternative, after
subtracting revenue from sale of recycled or salvaged materials and
landfill tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials from the landfill.
5. Provide alternatives to landfilling for at least the following materials:
a. Concrete.
b. Bricks.
c. Concrete masonry units.
d. Asphalt paving.
B. Once Owner has determined which of the landfill alternatives addressed in the
Proposal above are acceptable, prepare and submit Waste Management Plan;
submit within 10 calendar days after notification by Engineer.
C. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information:
1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire
project construction cycle, including types and quantities.
2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s)
where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and
the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s).
3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills
by reuse, salvage, or recycling.
a. List each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled.
b. List the local market for each material.
c. State the estimated net cost, versus landfill disposal.
4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention,
reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal.
5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be
diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for
acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for
recyclables, storage, and packaging.

67 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of

materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-
hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by
a waste hauler.
D. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of

trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date
and since last report.
1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to
submit Report will delay payment.
2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.
3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in cubic meters, of trash/waste material from the project
disposed of in landfills.
c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill,
and total disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of
quantity and cost.
4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in cubic meters, of trash/waste material from the project
delivered to incinerators.
c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator,
and total disposal cost.
quantity and cost.
5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on
other projects.
b. Amount, in cubic meters, date removed from the project site, and
receiving party.
c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net
total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material.
quantity and cost.
e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in
landfills or by incineration.
6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.
b. Amount, in cubic meters.
c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.
7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above,
as appropriate to disposal method.
11.2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. See Section 01 61 05 - Common product requirements for substitution submission

procedures.

68 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition
to requirements specified in Section 01 61 05:
1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product.

2. Cost savings on waste disposal, compared to specified product, to be
deducted from the Contract Price.
3. Proposed disposal method for waste product.
4. Markets for recycled waste product.
11.3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing

workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.
B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site

foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Engineer.
C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and

recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the
appropriate stages of the project.
D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.
1. Pre-bid meeting.
2. Pre-construction meeting.
3. Regular job-site meetings.
E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for
recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and
installers.
1. As a minimum, provide:
a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood
cut-offs for blocking.
b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable.
c. Recycling bins at worker lunch area.
2. Provide containers as required.
3. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be
recycled or salvaged.
4. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures that are nonhazardous,
recyclable, or reusable to the maximum extent possible; reuse project
construction waste materials if possible.
5. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic.
6. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to
subcontractors.
7. If an enclosed area is not provided, clearly lay out and label a specific area on-
site.

69 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked
in order to avoid contamination of materials.
F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according

to applicable regulations.
G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable
waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize
recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or
deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in
preparation for reuse.
I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.
END OF SECTION

70 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 SECTION 01 78 05 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
12.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.

B. Section 01 73 05 - Execution.
C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance

data.
D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
12.1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Engineer..
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of

contents before start of Work. Engineer will review draft and return one copy
with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during
construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten
days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection.
This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer

71 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final

submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after
final inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during

construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after
acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion,
prior to final Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of
acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
12.3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions
to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of

actual products installed, including the following:
1. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.

2. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:

72 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish ground floor datum.

2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
12.3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and
replacement parts.
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component
parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of

equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project
Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of

instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
12.3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture
designations.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for

cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and
methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard

printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the
operation and maintenance of the specific products.
12.3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.

2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

73 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.

4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard

printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the
operation and maintenance of the specific products.
C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating
instructions.
D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative

maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly
instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and

diagrams required for maintenance.
I. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
J. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
K. Include test and balancing reports.
L. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
12.3.5 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's
personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the
specification sections.
B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate
tabbed divider for each system.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 210 x 297 mm wire-ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 50 mm maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data
into related consistent groupings.

74 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of
contents.
E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Engineer, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of
responsible parties.
F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same
identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all
volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly
identified.
G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify
the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a
description of product and major component parts of equipment.
H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows:
1. Project Directory.
2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product
category.
a. Source data.
b. Operation and maintenance data.
c. Field quality control data.
d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
12.3.6 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item
of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of
beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 210 x 297 mm wire ring binders with durable
plastic covers.

75 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS,
with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and
equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.
G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the
Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the
specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.
H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of
Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as
necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address,
and telephone number of responsible principal.
END OF SECTION

76 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13 SECTION 01 79 05 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
13.1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in

specific specification sections.
B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:
1. All software-operated systems.

2. HVAC systems and equipment.
3. Plumbing equipment.
4. Electrical systems and equipment.
C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required

for:
1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection

products.
2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes.
3. Fixtures and fittings.

A. Section 1 Part 21 Inspection and Handover Procedures
B. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals:
13.1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to
needs and skill-level of attendees.
1. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training

plan.
2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.

77 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.

4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.
5. Include at least the following for each training session:
a. Identification, date, time, and duration.
b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.
c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.
d. Intended audience, such as job description.
e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate
training.
f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations,
hands-on, etc.
g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.
h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to
be provided by Contractor.
B. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of
two attendees per training session.
1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.

2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc.,
that are not included in O&M manuals.
3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation
and maintenance data.
C. Training Reports:
1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.

2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.
3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and
references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include
answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session.
4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session.
A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and

troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems.
1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or

installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.
2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with
necessary qualifications.
13.3.1 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

78 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations

for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.
B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless

Owner personnel training is specified.
C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.
D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including

start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and
troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive
maintenance.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial

Completion.
2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform
demonstration for other season within six months.
E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive

maintenance, and repair procedures.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial

Completion.
13.3.2 TRAINING - GENERAL
A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans
submitted.
B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.
C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.
D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified
or approved by the Commissioning Authority.
E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.
F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was
satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms.
G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained;

re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been
approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause
for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

79 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training

discuss:
1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation;
backup copies.
2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory
information, system narratives, and product specific information.
3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.
I. Product- and System-Specific Training:
1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.

2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and
constraints, and operational strategies.
3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-
down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for
maintenance, including preventative maintenance.
4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive
maintenance.
5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health
and safety issues and emergency procedures.
6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid
voiding coverage.
9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of
manufacturers.
10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.
11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.
J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer

during training session, provide written response within three days.
END OF SECTION

80 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14 SECTION 01 91 13 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS

Section includes
A. General requirements and procedures for project systems commissioning and related
activities to be applied on components, equipment and systems of the whole
construction as specified within the project specifications.
B. Commissioning Objectives
C. Commissioning Plan
D. Buildings systems and components to be commissioned
E. Commissioning Process
F. Maintenance manuals, training and maintenance
14.1.2 REFERENCES STANDARDS
14.1.2.1 Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or whats equivalent in latest

version
A. Section 1 - General
B. Section 19 Plumbing works Part 6
C. Section 20 Drainage works for buildings Part 7
D. Section 21 Electrical works Part 23, 24
E. Section 23 Fire fighting and fire alarm systems Part 5
14.1.2.2 Related section

C. 01 31 05 Project coordination
D. 01 32 05 Construction Progress Schedule.
E. 01 43 05 Quality assurance
F. 01 73 05 Execution.
G. 01 78 05 Closeout Submittals.
14.1.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval:

81 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions

that are shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered.
B. Product Data: If submittals to Engineer do not include the following, submit copies as
soon as possible:
1. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures.
4. Fan and pump curves.
5. Factory test reports.
6. Warranty information, including details of Owner's responsibilities in regard to
keeping warranties in force.
C. Startup Plans and Reports.
D. Completed Prefunctional Checklists.
14.1.4 COMMISSIONING OBJECTIVES

Among the commissionings scope of work and responsibility are:
A. Review of the building and its systems and architectural design to the requirements of
the Owner.
B. To bring mechanical, electrical and building architectural systems and components
from a state of static completion to a state of dynamic operation.
C. To verify conformance to contract requirements and to ensure completed facility
meets user stated requirements.
D. To confirm installations meet requirements and design intent of contract drawings and
specifications.
E. To compile and submit to the Contractor and the Owner a Commissioning Report, as
defined within the Commissioning Plan.
F. To review and assemble written verification that training was conducted for all
systems being commissioned. The training will be of sufficient quality and depth to
ensure that facility staff have all the needed information to effectively operate and
maintain all commissioned systems.
G. To verify accuracy and completeness of as-built drawings and Operations &
Maintenance Manuals with regards to the commissioned systems.
14.1.5 COMMISSIONING PLAN
Commissioning Plan consisting of, but not limited to the following, has been developed by the
Commissioning Agent and the Owner and includes:

82 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Details regarding roles and responsibilities during all phases of commissioning.

B. Design review process.
C. Contractor proving tests.
D. Out of contract tests.
E. Commissioning submittal reviews.
F. Pre-functional Check testing and verification procedures.
G. Functional Performance Testing and verification procedures.
H. Anticipated Seasonal or deferred commissioning.
I. Verification of training.
J. Review of As-built drawings and O&M Manuals for completeness.
K. Warranty activities.
L. System manual requirements.
14.1.6 COMMISSIONING AGENTS RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Develop a Commissioning Plan complete with Check-sheets, Responsibility Matrix,

and Commissioning Schedule.
B. Ensuring that all design and construction commissioning activities are carried out in
accordance with the Commissioning Plan.
C. Commissioning Agents will:
1. Complete design document reviews.
2. Incorporate Commissioning requirements into the construction documents.
3. Assemble Commissioning Team and ensure co-ordination of activities with team
in carrying out Commissioning Plan.
4. Manage the commissioning process through design, construction and post
construction.
5. Co-ordinate and Chair commissioning meetings throughout project construction.
6. Verify contractor testing and startup measurements and procedures.
7. Verify pre-functional and functional performance testing.
8. Co-ordinate activities between the Contractor, Commissioning Team and Third
Party Testing Agencies.
9. Verify building operators training has been completed by the Contractor and
assemble written verification of completed training by facility staff in the
Commissioning Report.
10. Review Operations and Maintenance Manuals and As-built Drawings.
11. Turn over completed Commissioning Report to the Owner.

83 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14.1.7 CONSULTANTS
A. Work in co-operation with the Commissioning Agent to produce Design

documentation that includes for project specific Commissioning activities.
B. Provide clarification/and or required information as requested by the Commissioning
Agent through Commissioning Site Visit Reports.
C. The consultant may, at their own discretion, verify any portion of the Pre- Functional
Checklists.
D. Consultant may, at their own discretion, witness Functional Performance Tests as
conducted by the Commissioning agent, however this is not a requirement of the
Consultant.
E. Provide copies of all Inspection reports to the Commissioning Agent.

The Contractor shall appoint personnel for testing, starting and operating equipment through
the commissioning process who have proved experience in applicable equipment and
systems commissioning, are able to interpret results of readings and tests and report state of
systems in a clear and concise manner.
14.2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT & INSTRUMENTS:
Contractor will provide:

A. all specialized tools, test equipment and instruments required to execute start-up,
checkout, and testing of equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test
and/or measure system performance within manufacturers specified tolerances.
Contractor may arrange with his subcontractors/suppliers/vendors for the provision of
any special data logging equipment required.
B. the necessary equipment (e.g. two-way radios, ladders.. etc.) as required to complete
the program and as outlined in this specification.
C. all safety equipment required for personnel involved in the starting, testing, adjusting
and balancing program.
D. a list of equipment and instruments which will be used in starting, testing, adjusting
and balancing of mechanical equipment for approval and review by the
Commissioning Staff.
E. use instruments supplied or calibrated by approved laboratory or manufacturer.
Submit the Commissioning Staff the current calibration certificate for each instrument
to be used.
F. Contractor will pay all costs associated with starting, testing, adjusting, preparation for
balancing and cleaning, including supply of instruments, equipment, supplies, and
consumable materials.

84 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14.3.1 GENERAL
Commissioning is the systematic process of ensuring all site and building components,
equipment, systems, and interfaces among systems perform in accordance with the design
intent and the contract documents. The commissioning process encompasses and
supplements the traditionally separate functions of system, equipment, and component
installation, check-out, start-up, calibration, operational testing, adjustment and balancing,
functional performance testing, development of O&M manuals, development of system
manuals, development of as-constructed drawings, operation and maintenance training, final
acceptance testing, and deferred functional performance and seasonal testing.
The commissioning process proceeds through construction according to the Commissioning
Plan and as described below.
14.3.2 COMMISSIONING PROCESS
A. The commissioning process commence during design and will proceed through
construction and post construction to the following general process and schedule.
Particularly during:
1. Design: Through design a review and planning process have been completed;
B. Construction:
1. Commissioning begins with Kick-off (or scoping) meeting called by the
contractors. Generally it shall be held within 90 days of projects award;
2. Throughout the course of construction the Division contractors are to complete
all specified contractor proving tests and submit the necessary documentation.
3. The Commissioning Agents will witness this testing at their discretion.
4. Throughout the course of construction the Division contractors are to complete
the Pre-Functional Check-sheets for each specified system/equipment for which
they are responsible.
5. A minimum 120 days prior to the start of the Functional Performance Tests a site
testing schedule will be developed by the Contractor in cooperation with the
Commissioning Team.
6. At this time copies of all Functional Performance Test Check-sheets will be made
available.
7. During the last three months of the construction process there will be a monthly
commissioning meeting to review the construction schedule and commissioning
8. Within 30 days of the start of the startup, check out and commissioning
verification process a dedicated Test Planning and Scheduling meeting will be
completed to coordinate the commissioning verification process.
9. Upon completion of the construction the design Consultant will identify that the
building startup and checkout is completed and the systems are suitable for
verification.
A. Commissioning Verification:
1. Verification of start-up and check-outs as specified in the project specifications,
Contracts documents and by the Commissioning Plan.

85 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Verification of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for mechanical, electrical and

HVAC plants specified by the Commissioning Team.
3. Sample review and acceptance by the Commissioning Team of the Pre-
Functional Check sheets for the specified Equipment shall be completed by the
contractors.
4. Completion and acceptance of all Functional Performance Tests (FPT) for the
specified building systems.
5. The FPT will be directed by the Commissioning Staff and witnessed by the
Commissioning Team.
6. The FPT will be performed by the responsible Contractors/subcontractors.
7. Additional commissioning meetings as necessary and detailed in Commissioning
Plan
C. Warranty: commissioning warranty activities are detailed in Commissioning Plan
1. Contractors representatives shall be present for all Commissioning of systems

included within the scope of their work.
2. Unless otherwise specified in writing by the Contractor, all testing and related
requirements specified herein will be performed prior to the issue of the
Substantial Performance Certificate.
14.3.3 WITNESSING OF CONTRACTOR PROVING TESTS
A. The Commissioning Agent may witness selected Contractor starting, testing,

adjusting, balancing and cleaning procedures.
B. Advise the Commissioning Agent in advance that starting, testing, adjusting,
balancing or cleaning processes are ready to commence. Consult with the
Commissioning Agent to determine which procedures he may elect to witness.
Provide advanced notice prior to commencement of each procedure or series of
procedures to allow the Commissioning Agent to arrange for witnessing of tests as
required.
C. To contractor to submit to the Commissioning Agent all testing, startup, adjusting,
balancing and cleaning reports to the Commissioning Agent on successful review by
the Consultant.
14.3.4 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST

A. Pre-Functional Checklists are the process to ensure the specified equipment is
installed to the contract requirements. To complete this work a database of the
checklists is completed by the Commissioning Agent. The Division Contractors shall
then complete the PC's during the course of construction for which they are
responsible. When commissioning commences the Commissioning Team will verify
the validity of selected sample PC's prior to commencing any performance tests. This
process ensures that the equipment and systems are correctly installed prior to
actually testing their operation.
B. Specifically the PC process shall follow these steps:
1. The Commissioning Agent will complete the PC forms using an approved data
base and hard copies will be provided to the contractor at the commissioning
kick-off meeting.

86 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Where the contractor identifies missing PC's they are to advise the
Commissioning Agent in writing. The Commissioning Agent will then provide the
missing verification forms within 21 days.
3. During the course of construction the Contractor shall complete the contractor
portion of the PC forms.
4. A minimum 14 days prior to commencing any performance tests the Contractor
shall submit the completed hard copies of the forms for review by the
Commissioning Agent. The Commissioning Agent will advise the Contractor of
any missing information which the Contractor shall rectify in a timely manner. It is
recommended, however, that the Contractor prepare the PC's during the course
of construction and submit then as they are completed during site review
meetings.
5. Upon receipt and acceptance off a portion or all of the PC's the Commissioning
Team under the direction of the Commissioning Agent shall verify all or a
selected portion there of for the completed PC's.
6. Any deficiencies in the PC's shall be corrected in a timely manner by the
Contractor.
C. Contractor will record all data gathered on site on start-up report forms and
commissioning PC and FPT sheets.
D. Contractor will make copies of all starting and testing data before equipment and
system start-up personnel leave site. Maintain one copy of all data taken during
starting on site.
E. Contractor will maintain one copy of all final starting, testing, adjusting and balancing
reports on site up to Substantial Completion of the Work for reference purposes.
14.3.5 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Functional performance tests (FPT's) are the process to ensure the systems operate
to the contract requirements.
B. To complete this work real time 100% point testing of all systems is completed by the
responsible Division Contractors under the direction and witness of the
Commissioning Agent and Team.
C. Prior to the FPT's commencing all Contractor and manufacturers startup and proving
tests specified elsewhere are to be completed and approved.
D. Prior to the FPT's commencing all PC's are to be completed and approved.
E. Prior to the FPT's commencing all integrated automation and testing, adjusting and
balancing of building architectural, mechanical and electrical systems for verification
is to be completed and approved.
F. Prior to the FPT's commencing all Third Party Testing and Contractor Proving Tests
are to be completed and approved unless specified otherwise.
G. FPT's shall be first conducted by the Contractor independent to the Commissioning
Team and then re-conducted and witnessed by the Commissioning Team based on
the mutually agreed schedule developed by the Commissioning Agent.
H. The FPT forms will be generated by the Commissioning Agent from an approved data
base and provided to the Contractors a minimum 30 days prior to commencing the
functional performance testing.

87 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Where the Contractor identifies missing FPT forms they are to advise the
Commissioning Agent in writing. The Commissioning Agent will provide the missing
verification forms within 14 days.
J. Contractor to record all data gathered on site on start-up report forms and
commissioning PC and FPT sheets.
K. Contractor to make copies of all starting and testing data before equipment and
system start-up personnel leave site. Maintain one copy of all data taken during
starting on site.
L. Contractor to maintain one copy of all final starting, testing, adjusting and balancing
reports on site up to Substantial Completion of the Work for reference purposes.
14.3.6 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND TEST APPROVAL

A. Documentation:
Along with the Contractor, the Commissioning Committee/Team shall witness and
document the results of all functional performance tests using the specific procedural
forms developed for that purpose.
The Commissioning Committee will include the filled out and approved forms in the
O&M manuals.
B. Non-Conformance:
The Contractor shall record the results of the operational and functional tests on the
appropriate procedure or test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall
be recorded on a master issues log and reported directly to the Engineer within 3
days of occurrence or sooner when scheduling and coordination require it. The
Engineer and the Contractor, in consultation with the commissioning manager, shall
determine the responsible party and a suitable plan for resolution.
The issues log shall be updated when the issue has been resolved.
Any required retesting by the Contractor shall not be considered a justified reason for
a claim of delay or for a time extension by the Contractor.
C. Final Approval of Functional Tests:
Final approval of an entire test shall not be given until there are no outstanding issues
for the system, equipment, or assembly in the issues log, and all related operation
and maintenance training and final acceptance testing is complete.
14.3.7 FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT

A final commissioning report, issued by the Commissioning Team, will be provided to the
Construction Manager/Engineer for his approval. The report shall include:
A. an executive summary,
B. a list of participants and roles,
C. a brief systems description
D. an overview of commissioning and testing scope
E. a general description of testing and verification methods.

88 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For each part of commissioned equipment or system, the report should contain the disposition
of the commissioning team regarding the adequacy of the equipment and documentation
according to contract documents in the following areas:
A. Equipment/System meeting its specifications.
B. Equipment/System installation.
C. Functional performance and efficiency.
D. Equipment/System documentation and design intent.
14.3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
14.3.8.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. For additional requirements See Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals
B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Engineer to manuals prior to
submission to Owner.
C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority
for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.
D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission
to Owner
14.3.8.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall train and instruct construction maintenance personnel in the
operation, adjustment, and preventative maintenance procedures of all systems and
equipment.
B. The Contractor shall work with the commissioning manager to develop appropriate
training plans and orientation agendas for equipment and assemblies, and shall
provide skilled trainers and training materials, including operation and maintenance
manuals, system manuals, and as-constructed drawings, for the sessions.
C. The Contractor shall obtain Engineer authorization to proceed with training prior to
initiating training unless approved otherwise.
D. Training will not be granted until the following criteria are met:
Functional performance testing of applicable systems, equipment, and components is
complete and all punch list items discovered during functional testing have been
remedied.
Operation and maintenance manuals, system manuals, and as-constructed drawings
for applicable systems, equipment, and components are at least 95 percent complete,
have been submitted to the Engineer for review, and the Engineer has approved
preparation of final operation and maintenance manuals, system manuals, and as-
constructed drawings.
E. Training sessions shall include identification of parts, description, servicing, and
troubleshooting in the training sessions. Special emphasis shall be given to first
response repair of system components.
END OF SECTION

89 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15 SECTION 04 42 10 - NATURAL STONE CLADDING
This section include natural stone cladding, including trim, base and accessories are shown
on the Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment
required to complete the Work.
A. External Natural stone cladding, Desert Brown Granite Stone, Flamed
15.1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ( hierarchy of codes as employer requirements)
13.1.2 National Fire Protection Association ( Nfpa )
NFPA 130 Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
13.1.2.1 Qatar Civil Defense Fire Safety Standards ( Qcdfss )

All materials, components, equipment and accessories and their installation shall conform to the
requirements of Civil Defence Department of the Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar. Particular
attention should be made with respect to the time required by the Civil Defence Department for
approval of schematic and wiring diagrams, layout diagrams etc.

version:
A. Section 1 General
B. Section 13 Part 4 Unit Mansory
C. Section 24 Finishes to building - Part 1 General

1. BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites
2. BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

90 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.1.2.3 Employer Requirements ( Er )
4.13.1.2 Safety: Non-combustible and Non-Toxic conforming to all applicable standards

and codes to meet or exceed the appropriate standards
4.13.1.3 Economy: Cost-effective and, to a consistent level of quality, commonly available
and not restricted to a few suppliers based on current industry levels of technology
and local building practice. Proven in use, they will not required new research,
designs or manufacturing techniques.
4.13.1.4 Durability: Materials shall be carefully selected for their wear, strength and
weathering qualities. They are to be resistant to abrasion, impact, vandalism,
humidity, temperature change, sunlight and the marine atmosphere. Colour and
appearance shall remain unchanged during the life cycle of the material.
4.13.1.6 Maintainability: Materials shall be easily cleaned, in a single operation, with
standard cleaning equipment and agents. Repair and replacement with regards to
the availability of material in the region shall be considered in the selection of
materials.
10.4.2.1 External Cladding Material (ECM) fixed to buildings shall be non-combustible and shall
be composed of environmentally friendly materials and substances
1
13.1.2.4 Global Sustainability Assessment System (Gsas)
[M.1] Regional Materials

a) Identify the products and materials that are available within region
( < 200 kilometers).
b) Materials & Products must be assembled as a finished product within the region to be considered
locally sourced.
[M.2] Responsible Sourcing of Materials
All materials must comply with the following standards.
a) Timber: FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) Chain of Custody Certification.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
c) BS8902: 2009 or equivalent.
[M.3] Recycled Materials
Verify and document the post- and Pre-consumer content of recycled material through manufacturer or
supplier specifications.
[IE.9] Low-Emitting Materials
a) All indoor materials and finishes shall be verified the VOC content (Refer to attached VOC Limit).
b) Material Safety Data Sheets or other documentation listing VOC content can be acceptable.
15.1.1.1 Leadership In Energy And Environmental Design (LEED)
15.1.1.1.1 Landscape & shelter Materials


1
Each material will be submit with complete assessment sheet Template. Refer section 01 61 05

91 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Labelling).


components.
15.1.1.1.2 LEED Required Documents

4) Cut sheets or manufacturers letters to document the listed products recycled content.
6) List of distances between the project and manufacturer,and distances between the project
and the extraction site.
7) cutsheets that document material origin and manufacture within a 500-mile radius of the
project site.
13.1.2.5 Related Section

A. 01 00 00 General requirements
13.1.2.6 Qatar Civil Defence Authority (Qcdd)

material acceptance process; The material need to have QCDD Certification from recognized
testing labs (Refer section 01 61 05 Common product requirements)
13.1.2.7 Dve Certificate

The material referred above shall be certified by DVE.
13.1.2.8 Other Requirements

Subcontractor shall provide all documents, certifications, test result and other information in
order to give evidence of the compliance with the Employer Requirements.
- ISO 14000-2004 - Environmental management systems -- Requirements with
guidance for use
- ISO 9001-2000 - Quality management systems Requirements

92 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ASTM C615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone

- ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
15.1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. GSAS Design assessment

1. For Initial Review, submit the Regional Materials Calculator and the
following supporting documents:
a.Intended list of materials
b.Documentation outlining all applicable materials and the percent of the
recycle content.
c. Full representative panel assembly / quality sample;
d. Mock up.
e. QCD certification
f. Material / Component technical data with Health and Safety
requirements;
g. Material / Component / Assembly calculation.
h. Method statement for construction / installation.
i. O&M manual and as built BIM and drawings
2. For final Review leading to final Design Certification, submit the Regional
Materials Calculator and the following supporting documents:
a.Bill of Quantities
b.List of materials
c.Specifications listing manufactures and locations
d.Cost estimates
e.Description of the material
f.Description of how the material has been reused
g.Report providing distances of manufacturers
h.Any documentation from manufacturers outlining thirdparty sourcing
standards such as FSC Chain of Custody Certification or ISO
Certification
B. Manufactures Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions

for all materials required, except bulk materials; transmit a copy of each instruction
to the installer. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with
requirements.
C. Submit representative samples ( 3m x 3m ) of each element that is to be used in the

finished work, showing the full range of colour and finish variations expected.
1. Review will be for color, pattern texture and dimensions.
2. For each tile type specified, minimum 3 samples with actual size indicating full
range of colors and finishes.
3. For each grout type specified, minimum 50 mm long samples indicating
manufacturer's full range of available colors.
4. For each accessory specified 2 units or two 300 mm long samples of linear
accessories. Also, submit 150 mm long sample of threshold.
D. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation.

93 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Shop Drawing ( BIM model and dwgs ): Indicate natural stone (granite) cladding
layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, and junctions with
dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, accessories, and
setting details.
F. Quality control Submittals:

1. Contractor's certification that products of this Section, as provided, meet or
exceed specified requirements.
2. Manufacturers of products of this Section meet specified qualifications.
3. Installers of products of this Section meet specified qualifications.
4. Manufacturers certifications that materials are suitable for intended use.
G. Extra Materials:
1. Provide wrapped, packaged and labelled extra material consisting of three
pieces of each type, size and configuration of stone used ont the project.
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall develop and
propose programs and methods of construction and testing to achieve the specified
quality to the approval of Project owner & Engineer.
B. Quality assurance
1. Comply with the applicable provisions of the standards and specifications.
2. Provide materials obtained from only one source and from the same
manufactured lot for each type and color of tile.
3. Cut natural stone shall be standard grade, free of flaws, reeds, rifts,
laminations, cracks, seam, starts or other defects which may impair its
strength, durability, or function. Exposed surfaces shall be free from spots,
spalls, chips, stains, discoloration or other defects which are not within the
approved sample range and would affect its appearance.
4. Color texture and finish of the stone shall be within the range of approved
samples.
5. Source: Provide stone units, which are the products of one supplier and one
quarry as specified. Stone material shall comply with the relevant standards.
C. Allowable variations in finished work shall not exceed the following deviations from
level of plumb and elevations, locations, slopes, and alignments shown:
1. Floors: 3 mm in 3 m run, any direction, 3 mm at any location, 0.8 mm offset
at any location.
D. Maintain one copy of followings on site.

1. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
Section with minimum 5 years experience.
2. Tile and Dimension Stone Manufacturer : Minimum 5 years documented
experience producing respective products specified in this Section.
3. Setting Materials and Grout Materials Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have
minimum 5 years documented experience producing respective products
specified in this section.

94 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Mock-Up
1. The Contractor shall construct mock-up panel using materials specified for final
work.
2. The Contractor shall construct mock-up as directed, at location indicated or
directed, and of full thickness and obtain Project Owner & Engineer
acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up.
15.1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
The Contractor shall deliver, handle and store equipment and material units in as the
following requirements:
A. Deliver materials on site a minimum of 24 hours before use.
B. Deliver packaged materials and store in a dry place in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
C. Prevent damage to materials such as chipping, breakage, freezing, or excessive

heat. Prevent contamination by water, moisture, foreign matter, or other causes.
D. Protect adhesives from overheating. Store in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
A. Temperature shall not be less than 10C during the work and for 7 days after
completion.
B. The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting during the work.
C. The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation when using organic grouts.
D. The Contractor shall not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
E. Uniform curing conditions shall be provided or maintained at the job-site.
13.1.3 WARRANTY
Product Warranty as defined in the tender contract; Guarantee shall cover repair and
replacement of defective material and workmanship.
15.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15.2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Cut natural stone shall be of sound flat surface, free from foreign matter, veins, hair-
cracks and pits.

95 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Cut natural stone shall have edges in good condition and without any broken
corners.
C. Granite Dimension Stone

1. Granite shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C615.
2. Size, Color, Pattern, Texture and Finish: Refer to secondary shelters
Drawings.
3. Provide granite of the highest density available for the particular type selected,
free from imperfections and even texture.
4. Obtain granite from one quarry with consistent color range and texture
throughout the work.
5. Provide granite cut from sound stock with even texture, shade and marking,
and free from imperfections.
6. Finishes: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Provide granite to the shapes and sizes indicated on the Drawings with length
and width dimensions of each individual slab within plus or minus 1 mm and
thickness within 2 mm from those specified.
8. Granite for Stairs: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, marble shall be 40
mm thick for treads with non-slip inserts and 20 mm thick for risers and
landings. as shown on Drawings.
9. Granite for external paving shall be of dimensions and pattern as indicated on
Drawings, thickness not less than 30 mm unless otherwise noted on drawings.
10. Granite shall be laid with matching grain and color.
D. Natural stone Paving in project are follows:

1. ABM CODE:S51 Desert Brown Granite, flamed
15.2.1.1 Installation Materials

Granite natural stone , thickness as per drawing, shall be installed on walls according to
drawing details and manufacturer's instruction.
Use Adhesive and mechanical fixing materials or as per drawing.
13.1.3.1 Sealants
The following sealant material shall be used as specified by Project Owner & Engineer :
A. Epoxy poly-sulphide sealant.
B. Polyurethane sealant.
C. Poly-sulphide sealant.
D. Silicone sealant.
13.1.3.2 Accessories
A. Spacers shall be of plastic and size shall be as specified in manufacturer's printed

installation instructions for tile thicknesses and joint widths indicated.
B. Neutral liquid cleaner.

96 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.1.4 TECHNICAL DATA Desert Brown Granite
Commercial name Desert Brown Granite

Description Desert Brown granite
Origin Italy, Piemonte
Petrographyc name
A material that, in the form in which it is used,
NFPA 101 Clause 4.6.13.1.(1) will not ignite, burn, support combustion, or
release flammable vapours when subjected to
fire or heat, is considered a non-combustible
material.
Compressive strength
172 Mpa
ASTM C170
Density 3
2630 Kg/m
ASTM C97
Water absorption at atmospheric pressure (% by
weight) 0.34 %
ASTM C 97
Abrasion resistance (hardness moss scale) 2.41 mm
ASTM C241
Coefficient of thermal expansion 0.0033 Mm/m C

Flexural strength
C880 25.8 MPa
Elasticity module 651.219 Kg/cm

2
Knoop micro hardness 487 Kg/mm
Solar Reflectance 0.36
Thermal Emittance 0.84
Solar Reflectance Index 37
13.1.5 TOLERANCE
A. All arises shall be clean, plane and of uniform dimension. Wearing surface areas
shall not be less than 70% of the plan area.
1. Tolerances: Length& Width +/- 2mm
2. Thickness +/- 3mm
B. All installed/rectified tiles shall be installed without pillow edges.
15.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
15.3.1 GENERAL
13.1.5.1 Inspection
A. The Contractor shall examine surfaces to receive granite natural stone cladding,
fixing materials and accessories before commencing tile work and make sure
that the deviations are within allowable tolerances for granite stone installation

97 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
on walls by adhesive, or portland cement mortar and dry-sets methods or other

specified in drawing.
B. Non-conforming surfaces shall be rectified to the satisfaction of Project Owner &

Engineer, before proceeding with the natural stone cladding work.
C. The Contractor shall verify that:

1. Surfaces are firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films.
2. Surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of
setting materials to the same surfaces.
3. Concrete surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission
rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits
recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
4. Vertical substrates shall be level and plumb while horizontal may be formed to
required slopes.
5. Locations and widths of required expansion joints are as per Contract
Drawings.
D. Electrical and mechanical items, grounds, anchors, supports, plugs, hangers etc.
to be installed in coordination with the work of other trades shall be in correct
place before proceeding with the tile work.
E. Installer's Examination
1. The installer shall examine conditions under which construction activities of this
Section are to be performed, including but not limited to conditions specified in
paragraph above, and submit written notification if substrates or conditions are
unacceptable.
2. The Contractor shall transmit 2 copies of installer's report to Project Owner &
Engineer within 24 hours of receipt of report.
F. Beginning construction activities of this Section indicates the Contractors
acceptance of substrates and conditions under which construction activities of
this Section are to be performed.
13.1.5.2 Preparation
The Contractor shall:
A. Clean surfaces and damp clean.
B. Neutralize, seal, and prepare substrates to receive tile in accordance with ANSI
A108.1 through A108.7 as applicable and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations of proprietary setting materials.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to
acceptable flatness tolerances.
15.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install natural stone wall cladding according to manufacturer's instructions, using

recommeded installing materials and / or drawing details.
B. Stone cladding pattern as per lay-out drawing

98 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Use proper adhesive and for a secure installation of natural stone units, fix them
mechanically to support.
D. Grout stone units except at expansion and control joints indicated to be filled with
sealant. Select grout materials to match the approved samples. Fill all gaps to produce a
finished joint which is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.
E. Remove grout spillage from face of stone as the work progresses.
F. Cure grout by maintaining in a moist condition for not less than 7 days
G. Form expansion and control joints as per specs. Provide where indicated, removable
divider strips of the same depth as the finished tile including setting bed. Remove strips
after grouting. Seal joints with sealant as specified .
15.3.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
A. The contractor shall follow grout specification and/or manufacturers recommendations

for cleaning of tile after grouting. Final clean-up shall be done by finishing or polishing
with a terry cloth or similar pad.
B. The contractor shall clean grout and setting materials from face of tile while materials are
workable. Leave tile face clean and free of all foreign material. Clean sealer from faces of
tile. Except as specifically recommended by both tile manufacturer and grout materials
manufacturer, acid cleaning of tile and grout surfaces is prohibited.
C. Polish surface of tile work with soft cloth.
13.1.5.3 PROTECTION
A. The contractor shall apply to all clean completed stone cladding works a protective coat
of neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to 1 part water or as specified by the
manufacturer of the cleaner.
B. The contractor shall protect installed work with craft paper or other hcovering during the
construction period to prevent damage. Protective coverings shall be removed before
final inspection.
C. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or
otherwise defective work.
END OF SECTION

99 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16 SECTION 05 12 05 - STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
The Work under this section consist of furnishing, fabrication and erection of structural steel
work as shown on drawings and specified herein.
1. Structural steel.
2. Prefabricated building columns with beams.
3. Accessories and grout.
Location
A. Secondary Shelters Canopy as per architectural drawings
16.1.2.1 National Fire Protection Association ( Nfpa )


The fire alarm system contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved list of, the Civil
Defence Department.

version:
B. Section 16 Structural Steelworks
C. Section 17 Part 4 Architectural metal work
D. Section 26 Painting and decorating

100 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
16.1.2.4 Global Sustainability Assessment System (Gsas)2

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
Verify and document the post- and Pre-consumer content of recycled material through manufacturer
or supplier specifications.


a) Use materials with recycled content at least 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total
value of the materials in the project.
Labelling).


components.

2
Each material will be submitted with complete assessment sheet Template. Refer section 01 61 05

101 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

site.


16.1.2.8 Other Requirement

order to give evidence of the compliance with the Employer Requirements. Please refer to
15.1.3 - Related Documents and following chapters.
16.1.3 Related Documents
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
B. Both American Standards and British Standards referred to below, together with all
appropriate references listed within those Standards, shall be used with this
Specification. The edition to be used shall be that current with all amendments as
published at the date of this Specification, except that the latest editions of
Standards may be used when no reduction in quality will result. Any differences
between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to the Engineer
for his ruling. Where a Standard has been specified an equivalent internationally
recognized Standard, such as DIN, may use subject to the Engineers approval.

102 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. ASTM International:
ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
AISC Northridge Interim Observations and Recommendation on
Technical Bulletin No. 2 Steel Moment-Resisting Frames, October 1994
American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT):
ASTM E94 Guide for Radiographic Testing
ASTM E142 Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic
ASTM E164 Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments
ASTM E165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method
ASTM E709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
ASTM E1032 Method for Radiographic Examination of Weldments American
Welding Society (AWS):
AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
AWS A3.0 Standard Welding Terms and Definitions, Including Terms for Brazing,
Soldering, Thermal Spraying and Thermal Cutting
AWS A5 Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals Series
AWS B1.10 Guide for the Nondestructive Inspection of Welds AWS C5.4
Recommended Practices for Stud Welding
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel
AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code Aluminum
AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
AWS D10.4 Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium- Nickel
Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing
AWS D10.9 Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for
Piping and Tubing 14. AWS QC 1 Standard for AWS Certification of Welding
Inspectors
D. EN Eurocodes
EN 1993-1-1:2005 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - Part 1-1: General rules
and rules for buildings
EN 1993-1-4:2006 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - Part 1-4: General rules -
Supplementary rules for stainless steels
EN 1993-1-8:2005 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - Part 1-8: Design of joints
ENs, ETAGs and ETAs for construction products relevant for steel structures;
EN 1090: Execution of steel structures Technical requirements;
SCI P291: Structural design of stainless steel
16.1.4 Summary
A. The Contractor shall provide structural steel as shown on the Drawings, specified
herein, and needed for a completed and proper installation. The Drawings referred to
in these Contract Documents and those subsequently provided are intended to
indicate the outline of the structure, related elements and structural members to be
employed and the standard of detail required. After consideration of all criteria and his
own production arrangements, the Contractor may make proposals for changes in

103 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
any of the details, sizes or materials shown or referred to in the Tender Documents.
However such change shall be only limited to the extent that they do not change the
stiffness and behaviour of the structure.
B. If the changes suggested by the Contractor are of such nature that they affect the
structural stiffness and behaviour significantly then the Contractor shall be
responsible for carrying out the independent Wind Tunnel Test from the prior
approved agency to arrive at the appropriate wind loads on the structure. All
expenses towards such tests and all associated consultancy changes shall be borne
by the Contractor.
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Prefabricated building columns with beams.
3. Grout.
16.1.4.1 Definitions
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by BS EN 10088-
Part 1-2005 Stainless Steels, BS EN 1993-Part 1-4-2006 Eurocode 3 - Steel
Structures - Supplementary Rules For Stainless Steels and SCI P291: Structural
design of stainless steel.
B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as
"SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns,
beams, and braces and their connections.
C. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as
"Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and non-structural
elements to protected zones are limited.
D. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant
degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and
which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.
16.1.4.2 Performance Requirements

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive
engineering design by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
B. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and BS 5950.
C. Moment Connections: Type PR, partially and FR, fully restrained as applicable and
as indicated on the drawings.
D. Construction: All frame types as applicable and as indicated on drawing.
16.1.5 Submittals
A. Product Data:
Submit two (2) copies, to the Engineer on demand, of the manufacturers test
certificates verifying that the materials comply with the relevant British Standards for
all structural steel, bolting materials and welding consumables.

104 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Shop Drawings:
1. The Engineer will supply the Contractor with information necessary for the
preparation of his drawings and documents. If the Contractor discovers any
contradiction or ambiguity in the information supplied by the Engineer then
written clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer.
2. The drawings referred to herein and those subsequently provided are intended to
indicate the outline of the structure, related elements and structural members to
be employed and the standard of detail required. After consideration of all
criteria and his own production arrangements, the Contractor may make
proposals for changes in any of the details, sizes or materials shown or referred
to in the Tender documents. The shop drawings must show fabrication of
structural-steel components and include;
a. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other
pertinent data.
b. Include embedment drawings.
c. Indicate welds by standard BS EN 22553 symbols, distinguishing between
shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds
where backing bars are to remain.
d. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and
field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted
connections.
e. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system.
f. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
g. Identify demand critical welds.
h. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads,
include structural design data.
3. The Contractor shall provide the following documents:

a. Two (2) copies of marking plans and details for holding-down bolts, cast-in
ferrules and other embedded items.
b. Two (2) copies of Fabrication drawings.
c. All connection details including calculations fully describing the method of
connection design. Two (2) copies of each revision of his shop drawings
and calculations to the Engineer for review allowing 10 working days for
each review. Additional copies of the connection design calculations and
the shop drawings are to be provided for the approvals from authorities.
d. The shop drawings and calculations shall be deemed to have undergone
an internal check and been updated as necessary prior to this release for
review. The Contractor's drawing register indicating current revisions is to
be kept on site along with a full set of current drawings.
e. Welding procedure details
f. Fabrication method statement
g. Erection marking plans
h. Erection method statement including calculations The Erection method
statement to be submitted within two (2) weeks of the acceptance of the
works contract tender, including details of (with drawings as appropriate):
-Method and sequence of erection
- Allocation of cranage time required

105 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Calculation of erection stresses

- Details for any temporary works including fixing details needed to
maintain stability during erection and until permanent works stability is
complete, including temporary guys and bracing proposed for use
during erection.
i. Details of the Quality Assurance Plan for structural steelwork together with
full details of the stage control and inspection documents
j. As erected drawings indicating survey information
4. Two (2) copies of each document shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval and fabrication shall not be commenced until such approval has been
given in writing. The drawings shall be submitted in related batches sufficiently
in advance of the scheduled fabrication date to ensure that the Engineer has
sufficient time and information to give full consideration to the proposals on the
documents and for any changes to be incorporated and re-submitted for
approval. Unless otherwise specified or agreed in writing, a period of at least 30
days shall be allowed from receipt of the documents by the Engineer to their
return. These approval copies shall be additional to the number of copies of final
drawings to be supplied.
5. All documents submitted for approval shall have already been checked by the
Steelwork Contractor and certified accordingly.
6. The Engineer will verify the correct interpretation of his requirements but is not
responsible for verifying the dimensions or checking the strength or practicability
of the details.
7. Approval of the documents by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his
obligations. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for his drawings
including their accuracy (relative to the Engineer's drawings) the correctness of
detail and the proper design of connections and joints and shall be responsible
for any additional work required as a result of defects in his drawings.
8. Where the steelwork connects to an existing structure, the Contractor shall verify
all dimensions that may affect fabrication and notify the Engineer in writing of
any discrepancies before fabrication commences.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified installer, fabricator, professional engineer and

testing agency.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop
primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
G. Product Test Reports: For the following:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Direct-tension indicators.
3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shear stud connectors.
5. Shop primers.
6. Non-shrink grout.
H. Source quality-control reports.

106 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Design Guide
1. The structural steelwork shown on the drawings and described in this
specification has been designed to BS 5950, EN 1993-1-4:2006 and SCI P291
where applicable, unless stated otherwise.
2. Notwithstanding the details relating to the tender, the Contractor will be
responsible for the complete design of member connections to BS 5950 and EN
1993-1-4:2006.
3. Steel grade(s) unless shown otherwise on the drawings:-
a) Sections other than hollow sections S275 to BS EN 10025;
b) Hollow sections S275 to BS EN 10210.
c) Stainless Steel 316L to EN 1993-1-4:2006
4. Complete the design and detailing of connections to BS 5950, EN 1993-1-4:2006
and SCI P291 to satisfy loading requirements specified or otherwise calculable
from the information given.
J. Connections and Joints

1. General
a) The Contractor shall design and detail all steel connections.
b) Where typical connections are shown on the Engineer's drawings the
Contractor shall satisfy himself as to their practicability and he shall be at
liberty to put forward alternative suggestions for their design.
c) All connections designed by the Contractor shall be submitted for the
Engineer's review. The Contractor shall provide two (2) numbers of copies of
each revision of calculations to demonstrate the adequacy of connections
which he has designed. In addition to other loads, all connections shall be
designed to resist construction loading.
d) Connections shall be designed taking account of the effects of any
eccentricity on the component parts of the connection, including welds and
bolts.
e) The Contractor shall not introduce eccentricity into the layout of the members
nor into the arrangement of the connections except as agreed by the
Engineer in writing.
f) Before commencing the workshop drawings the Contractor shall prepare and
submit for the Engineer's approval drawings showing typical details proposed
for the connections.
g) The Contractor shall meet the Engineer approximately 10 days after these
drawings have been submitted, at a time and place agreed by the Engineer,
to review these drawings and co-ordinate the procedure for the approval of
workshop drawings.
h) Simply supported end connections shall provide sufficient flexibility to
accommodate the end rotation of the beam. This flexibility may be provided
by movement of bolts in clearance holes or by flexure of cleats or endplates.
Care must be taken to ensure that the welds and bolts are strong enough to
resist the forces necessary to produce such movement or flexure.
i) In cleated end connections of beams the cleats shall project 2mm beyond the
end of the member unless specified otherwise on the drawings.
j) Load carrying connections shall have not less than two bolts of a size
appropriate to the member or else welds giving a similar capacity.
K. Bolted Connections

107 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Unless specified otherwise preloaded high strength bearing type bolts shall
be used for all connections to main structural members and trusses.
b) Unless specified otherwise, ordinary bolts in clearance holes tightened to the
snug tight condition will be acceptable for connections of such members as
wind bracings, sheeting rails and purlins and for minor secondary members.
c) Nuts in connections subject to vibration shall be of the self-locking type or
provided with lock-nuts, except where high strength friction grip fasteners are
used.
d) Whenever bolted connections are used, the reduced sectional area of
members shall be computed and the members strengthened if required.
2. Connections of Runway Beams and Trolley Beams:
a) Connections of runway beams shall comply with BS 2853. Special attention is
drawn to the provisions of Appendix G of BS 2853 - see Amendment No. 3
(PD 6225). Connections of trolley beams for window cleaning trolleys and the
like shall be designed as for runway beams.
L. Design Constraints
1. Unless required or permitted otherwise, comply with the following when
completing the design and detailing of the work:
a) Position members forming bracing systems or girders of lattice construction
so that their lines of action intersect at a point.
b) Bolts to be grade A4-70 or 80 and not less than 16 mm diameter.
c) Weld leg length to be 6mm fillet weld minimum unless notes otherwise.
M. In order to meet the requirements for erection tolerances under final dead load, and
the criteria of BS 5950 for deflections due to live loads, it will be necessary to pre-
camber those members or pre-set those elements that would not otherwise comply.
The amount of camber or pre-setting necessary to meet the requirements of this
Specification shall be agreed with the Engineer and shall be shown on the shop
drawings.
16.1.6 Quality Assurance
A. The Contractor shall operate a Quality Assurance System for all stages of the work
and all work shall be in accordance with that system. The Contractor shall have
internationally acceptable accreditation to the approval of the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall operate a Quality Assurance System for all stages of the work
to the approval of the Engineer and all work shall be in accordance with the
requirements set out in Section 1.
C. All workmanship, material and tests (where required) shall comply with the
appropriate British Standard and be in accordance with the drawings all to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
E. Any Approval by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities.
16.1.7 Welding Test
A. All welds shall be visually inspected by an accredited test laboratory.

B. Certification shall be provided for all welders following and if specified, carry out
approval tests to BS EN 287-1 or BS EN 4872: Pt. 1 as applicable.
C. Keep a record on Site to identify welders responsible for major welds for both on
and off site welding.

108 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Non-destructive testing:
2. Approved methods of non-destructive testing:

a. Ultrasonic test as per ANSI D1-1/6/F
b. Radiographic testing as per ASTM E94 and ASTM E747.
c. Magnetic Particle testing as per ASTM E709.
d. Penetrant testing as per ASTM E165.
3. Destructive tests on samples:

a. Traverse tensile test as per BS EN 18
b. Traverse bend test as per BS EN 1639
c. Side Bend Tests
d. Macro Examination
4 Acceptance criteria: as per ANSI D1-1/6/C.
5 Documentation: All tests shall be recorded for references. Records shall include
location of welds test samples, types of test, date of test, inspection or testing
personnels information, and test result. The test records shall be submitted for
records / make available for inspections.
6 Corrective measures: All welds that fail the tests shall be rectified and re-tested if
this is not possible, the metal section shall be partially or entirely replaced at no
additional cost. The corrective actions shall be proposed, approved, executed and
documented for further records.
7 In the event that a failure is observed, an additional 15% weld locations (locations
to be confirmed by Site Engineer) are to be tested at the Faade Contractors own
cost.
16.1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and
spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and
deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,
damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace
damaged materials or structures as directed.

109 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels

intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency
observes repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and
lubricating fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
C. Deliver materials to the job site properly marked to identify the location for which
they are intended.
D. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
E. Store in a manner to maintain identification and to prevent damage. Each grade of
steel shall be stored separately.
F. Particular care shall be taken when transporting, handling or storing parts which
have been metal sprayed, galvanized or painted. If the coating is damaged it shall
be restored to comply with the relevant requirements of Specification Corrosion
Protection for Steelwork.
G. Each type and grade of bolt and each type and grade of welding consumable shall
be clearly identified and stored separately.
H. Each type of welding consumable shall be stored in environmental conditions suited
to that type.
I. An assembly, which contains several loose parts, may be identified by a single tag
or marking provided that the whole unit is put together before delivery in such a way
that it will not accidentally fall apart.
J. Holding down bolts shall be delivered to site with the threads protected against
corrosion with Type TP 4a Soft-film grease as specified in BS 1133: Section 6.
Where specified metal sleeves shall be supplied in accordance with the drawings.
K. Fabricated parts shall be handled and stacked in such a way that permanent
damage is not caused to the components. Means shall be provided to minimize
damage to the protective treatment on the steelwork.
L. All work shall be protected from damage in transit. Particular care shall be taken to
stiffen free ends, prevent permanent distortion, and adequately protect all machined
surfaces. All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, small plates and articles generally shall
be suitably packed and identified.
M. Do not allow components to swing freely. Use man-made fibre ropes, webbing or
chains with clean, undamaged heavy rubber sheathing to hold and guide the lift into
place.
N. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability, adequacy, accuracy and
correct assembly of the structure during all stages of erection.
O. Throughout the erection of the structure, the steelwork shall be securely bolted or
fastened in order to ensure that it can adequately withstand all loadings liable to be
encountered during erection, including where necessary, those from erection plant
and its operation.
P. Any temporary bracing or temporary restraint shall be left in position until such time
as erection is sufficiently advanced so as to allow its temporary bracing, bolts,
members, etc, to be provided for erection purposes shall be made so that they do
not weaken the permanent structure or impair serviceability.
Q. Temporary bracing shall be positioned so as to cause the minimum of interference
with other trades. Protection to temporary bracing shall conform to BS 5493.

110 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R. Temporary bracing shall be removed by the Main Contractor and the structure
made good as deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator at the expense of
the Main Contractor.
16.1.9 Coordination
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them.

Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that
shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Safe removal.
C. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal
templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
16.1.10 Inspection and Testing
A. Carry out all inspection and testing in accordance with this section and the relevant
standards.
B. In the event that materials or workmanship fail to comply with the requirements
specified herein, carry out further inspection and testing to satisfy the engineer.
Testing laboratories shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
C. Carry out any additional inspection and testing required by the Engineer at
Contractor cost.
D. Demonstrate to the Engineer that full records are maintained through all stages of
the work. Make these records freely available for inspection by the Engineer at any
time.
16.1.11 Acceptance of the Engineer
A. Obtain acceptance of the Engineer wherever required, in writing before the work is
undertaken.
B. If any deviation is required from any part of this Specification, obtain such approvals
in writing before proceeding with any such deviation.
16.2.1 Structural-Steel Materials
A. All stainless steel plates or elements shall be per AISI grade 316L
B. All stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts shall be AISI grade 316 grade 70 or 80
C. Stainless steel member to be laser fuse welded.
1. Basis of design: MONTANSTAHL (www.monstanstahl.com)
D. Welding Electrodes:
1. All electrodes shall have a yield strength, tensile strength, toughness and
ductility not less than those specified for the grade of steel being welded.

111 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Covered electrodes for manual metal-arc welding shall comply with the
requirements of BS 639.
3. When weathering steel is to be welded the welding electrodes shall be of
matching composition to the parent material.
E. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type
recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and remain watertight.
F. Welding:
1. Stainless Welding: Welding electrodes and welding rods for stainless steel shall
conform to AWS A5.4 and AWS A5.9 as recommended by their manufacturers
for the positions and other conditions of actual use. Matching filler metals shall
be compatible with the Type 316 stainless steel, as applicable.
2. The dimensions of rolled steel sections shall comply with BS 4: Part 1 or BS
4848. Dimensional tolerances shall comply with BS EN 10034 or BS EN 10056
as appropriate. The dimensional tolerances for flats round and square bars shall
be as specified in BS EN 10025 Clause 2.2. The tolerances for plate and strip
produced on continuous mills shall comply with BS EN 10051 or BS1449 as
appropriate. Tolerances for plates produced by non-continuous mills shall
comply with BS EN 10029, and thickness class A tolerances shall apply. The
tolerance over or under the nominal thickness shall be equal to half the total
thickness tolerance.
3. All steel in plates and sections shall comply with the Standards listed in Table 1
as appropriate, except that rimming steel shall not be used. Only new steel shall
be used; the surface condition of steel shall be in accordance with subsection
Fabrication - Surfaces.
Standard Product Type

BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels - Technical
delivery conditions.
BS EN 10113 Parts 1, 2 & 3 Hot rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels. Part 1 -
General delivery conditions. Part 2 - Delivery conditions for
normalised steels.
Hot rolled quenched and tempered weldable structural steel
BS EN 10137
plates.
BS EN 10210 Parts 1 & 2 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
structural steels Part 1 - Technical delivery requirements Part 2 -
Dimensions, tolerances & sectional properties
BS EN 10155 Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance.

Technical delivery conditions.
BS 7668 Weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections
in weather resistant steels.
EN 1993-14:2006 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - Part 1-4: General rules -
Supplementary rules for stainless steels

112 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 1 Standards Applicable to Various Products of Structural Steel

1. Except where noted or agreed otherwise, the particular grade of steel used shall
be determined in accordance with BS 5950
2. Part 1 Section 2.4.4 adopting a value of K equal to one.
3. The Contractor shall ensure that the quality of the manufactured steel is in
agreement with the aesthetic appearance requirement of the structure. Where
material is required 'free from laminations' it shall be tested in accordance with
BS EN 10160 and agreed by the Engineer. All cap plates and end plates over
25mm thick are to be laminar free material.
4. Steel supplied to BS EN 10025 shall have the following options invoked by the
Contractor at the time of placing an order for the steel:
a. Option 3: The method of deoxidation shall be as given in table 2 of BS
EN10025.
b. Option 5: The carbon equivalent value shall not exceed the values given in
table 4 of BS EN 10025.
c. Option 7: The carbon content of steels type S355JO, S355J2, and S355K2
shall not exceed 0.18% by ladle analysis.
d. Option 9: The impact properties of quality JR material shall be in
accordance with table 6 of BS EN 10025 and shall be verified by test.
e. Option 10: When required by this specification, or when noted on the
drawings, products with improved properties perpendicular to the surface
shall be supplied in quality class Z35 to BS EN 10164.
f. Option 11: Where steel products are to be hot-dip galvanised or hot
enamelled then the steel manufacturers shall be informed of the particular
process in order that steel of a suitable condition is supplied.
g. Option 12: Specific inspection and testing shall be carried out for all steel
products according to the requirements of clauses 8.2 to 8.9 of BS EN
10025. The inspection document shall comprise the inspection certificates
as defined in BS EN 10021.
h. Option 14: The verification of the mechanical properties for quality JR steels
shall be carried out by cast.
i. Option 17: Flat products in grades S355JR and S355JO that are greater
than 12.5mm thick shall be supplied in a normalised or equivalent condition.
Any flat product that will be subject to hot working during fabrication or
erection shall be supplied in a normalised or equivalent condition. Quality
grades J2G4 and K2G4 shall not be supplied as an option unless specified
by the Engineer.
j. Option 22: Any long product that will be subject to hot working during
fabrication or erection shall be supplied in a normalised or equivalent
condition.
k. Option 24: Where sections are to be split during the fabrication process then
the steel producer shall be made aware of this requirement in order that
steel of a suitable condition is supplied.
8. Steel to BS EN 10113 Pt3 shall not be used unless specified by the Engineer, in
which case the options required for steel to Pts 1 & 2 shall be invoked. Steel to BS
EN 10113 Pts 1 & 2 shall have to the following options invoked:
a. Option 2: The carbon equivalent value shall not exceed the values given in
table 2 of BS EN 10113 part 2 or 3 as appropriate. Unless agreed otherwise
with the Engineer, prior to material ordering, the carbon equivalent value for
steel grade S460 to Pt.2 shall be no greater than 0.51%.

113 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
b. Option 4: Only steel of designation NL shall be supplied unless otherwise

specified by the Engineer.
c. Option 6: When required by this specification, or when noted on the
d. Option 7: When steel products are to be hot-dip galvanised or hot
enamelled then the steel manufacturer shall be informed of the particular
process so that steel of a suitable condition is supplied.
e. Option 10: Hard stamping of steel shall not be allowed.
f. Options 13 & 16: All steel products shall be free from internal defects that
would exclude them from being used for their intended purpose. When
option 6 above applies options 13 and 16 shall also be invoked and
ultrasonic testing shall be carried out to BS EN 10164 or Euronorm 186 as
appropriate.
g. Option 15: Where sections are to be split during fabrication then the steel
producer shall be made aware of this requirement so that steel of a suitable
condition is supplied.
9. Steel supplied to BS EN 10137 shall have the following options invoked:
a. Option 2: The product analysis shall be performed to check compliance with
Table 1 of BS EN 10137 - part 2.
b. Option 5: When required by this specification or when noted on the
10. Steel supplied to BS EN 10210 Part 1 shall have the following options invoked.
a. Option 1.2 and 1.4: The carbon equivalent value shall not exceed the values
given in tables A2 or B2 of BS EN 10210 Pt 1.
b. Option 1.6: The impact properties of quality JO and JR steel shall be verified
by test and shall be in accordance with tables A3 or B3 of BS EN 10210
Part 1.
c. Option 1.7: Where steel products are to be hot dip galvanised then the steel
manufacturer shall be informed of the particular process in order that steel
of a suitable condition is supplied.
d. Option 1.9: Specific inspection and testing shall be carried out for all steel
products in accordance with clauses 7.1 to 7.3 of BS EN 10210 Part 1. The
inspection document shall include an inspection certificate of type 3.1B to
BS 10204.
11. Weathering steels supplied to BS EN 10155 shall have the following options invoked
by the Contractor at the time of placing an order for the steel:
a. Option 4: The carbon equivalent value for grade S355 steel shall be limited
to a maximum of 0.52% and for grade S235 steel the CEV limit shall be
0.44%.
b. Option 6: The impact properties of all steels shall be in accordance with
table 6 of BS EN 10155 and shall be verified by test.
c. Option 7: Specific inspection and testing shall be carried out for all steel
products according to the requirements of clauses 8.2 to 8.9 of BS EN
10155. The inspection document shall comprise of the certificates as
defined in BS EN 10021.
12. Steel supplied to BS 7668 shall have the following options invoked:

114 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Option B4. The carbon equivalent value shall not exceed the value given in
Table B1 of BS 7668.
13. Steel castings and forgings shall comply with BS3100 and BS29 respectively and
shall only be used when the use of such materials will not be detrimental.
16.2.1.1 Bolts, Connectors, And Anchors

A. Ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with BS 3692, BS 4190 or BS 4395 Part 1 for
hexagon headed bolts or BS 4933 for cup headed or countersunk bolts. Unless
otherwise specified bolts and nuts shall be of grade 8.8. Only one grade of steel
shall be used for each diameter of bolt.
1. Ordinary washers shall comply with BS 4320. Plain washers shall be made of
steel and taper or other special shaped washers shall be of steel or malleable
cast iron.
2. Bolting materials that have been sheradised or otherwise coated shall be
manufactured and coated to give a satisfactory fit between the finished bolt and
its nut.
3. High strength friction grip bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with BS 4395
Part 1.
4. Galvanising, sheradising, or electroplating of nuts, bolts and washers shall be
carried out only by the manufacturer of these items.
5. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be spun galvanised, or as otherwise approved.
Prior to any work being undertaken the Contractor shall confirm in writing that the
finish is compatible with the steel finish and the environment.
6. Where specified, the nuts used on connections subject to vibration shall be
secured to prevent loosening. Self-locking nuts or an approved chemical product
shall be used or else the nuts shall be secured by the use of locknuts. Where
slotted holes are provided for movement connections the joint shall be free to
move.
7. Direct-Tension Indicators:
a. Standard: To BS 7644-1.
b. When placed under bolt head, prevent bolt turning when tightening.
c. When placed under nut, protect nibs with a hardened washer and
prevent both washers from turning when tight.
d) Manufacturer: to be agreed with main contractor unless specified on
the drawings.
e) Product reference: to be agreed with main contractor unless specified
on the drawings
f) Grade: Appropriate for grade of bolt and nut assembly.
g) Finish: Appropriate for specified bolt and nut assembly.
h) Ancillary components: Washers to BS 7644-2. Used as recommended
in BS 7644-1, Annex A.
i) Post installation and inspection treatment: Where no further protective
coating is specified, apply a butyl rubber sealing compound to seal
measuring gap around indicators.
B. Shear Stud Specification:
1. If required and unless stated otherwise on the drawings, shear studs are to be
proprietary studs manufactured from low carbon steel with a minimum yield point
2 2
of 350N/mm , ultimate tensile strength of 450N/mm and elongation of 15% on a

115 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
gauge length of 5.65 A when tested in accordance with BS18. Shear Studs will
have a shank diameter of 19mm and a height to suit the slab thickness with a
minimum height of 100 mm after through deck welding.
C. Shear Stud Welding:
1. Welders to be certified by the equipment manufacturer or other recognised
authority as competent for the work.
2. Top surface of the bean flange to be free from mill scale, rust, grease, oil, paint
and any other substance detrimental to welding. Ensure that flange is clean prior
to laying decking.
3. Prefabrication primer and other paints should not be used in areas to be welded.
D. Shear Stud Testing

1. Before stud welding is commenced, the welding procedure should be checked
by trial welding under site conditions. These trials should cover the full range of
flange thicknesses and stud sizes to be used. Where welding through profiled
steel sheets is required, this should be included in the welding trials.
2. In these trials a minimum of two studs should be welded for each case. These
studs should be cold bent manually to an angle of 30 degrees by means of a
1.3m steel tube placed over the stud. Test bending should always be in the
direction of the span of the beam. Hammer impact testing is not allowed. If
failure occurs in the weld zone of either stud, the welding equipment should be
adjusted and the test repeated.
3. All shear studs to be ring tested by tapping lightly with a small hammer.
Properly welded studs will ring soundly whilst imperfectly welded studs will give
dull sound.
4. Any studs indicating weld implication should be tested to 15 degrees from the
vertical. If the weld does not fracture, the stud should be considered
acceptable. If the weld facture occurs a replacement stud should be fixed
slightly away from the imperfect area
5. Sleeves: Bolt sleeves shall be made from mild steel sheet and shall not allow
the passage of cement grout into the tube. The gauge thickness of steel
appropriate to the sleeve diameter will be shown on the bolt schedules. The
length of the sleeve shall be accurate within a tolerance of plus or minus 3mm
and the diameter within plus or minus 5mm. The ends of a sleeve shall be
square to its centre line.
E. Cast-In Holding Down Bolts

1. For the purposes of this Specification the length of a holding down bolt shall be
taken as the overall length excluding the head (or clear of the bottom nut in the
case of a fabricated bolt) i.e., the sum of the embedded length, the projecting
length and the thickness of the anchor plate.
2. Manufactured Bolts
a) Bolts obtained from bolt manufacturers shall comply with the requirements
of BS 3692 or BS 4190 as appropriate.
b) Nuts shall comply with the requirements of BS 3692 or BS 4190 as
appropriate and shall be of at least the recommended strength grade
corresponding to the strength grade of the bolts. Nuts shall be of normal
standard thickness; thin nuts shall only be used as locknuts.
c) Unless specified otherwise bolts shall be of strength grade 4.6 with nuts of
strength grade 4 or higher.

116 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Fabricated Bolts
a) Where bolts are fabricated from plain round bar the threads shall be ISO
metric, coarse pitch series, free fit as specified in BS 3643. Both ends
shall be threaded and the nut at the bottom end shall be welded in place to
prevent it from turning. The diameters used shall be those for standard
bolts quoted in BS 3692 and BS 4190 as appropriate.
b) The weight of the bar shall be within plus or minus 2.5% of the weight
appropriate to the true cross sectional area. The bolt shall be straight
within a tolerance of 2mm per metre length of the bolt, with a minimum
tolerance of 2mm. The overall length shall be accurate within a tolerance
of plus or minus 3mm, the bottom nut being so positioned that the length
shall be within a tolerance of minus zero and plus 5mm. The threaded
length shall be accurate within a tolerance of minus zero and plus 20mm.
c) Nuts shall comply with the requirements of BS 3692 or BS 4l90 as
appropriate and shall be of a strength grade such that the specified proof
load stress of the nut is not less than the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength of the bolt material, except that the nuts of strength grade
4 may be used with bolts of grade 43 steel to BS 4360. Nuts shall be of
normal standard thickness; thin nuts shall only be used as locknuts.
d) Unless specified otherwise, bolts shall be of grade 43 steel to BS 4360
with nuts of strength grade 8.8 or higher.
4. Anchor Plates:
a) Unless specified otherwise, anchor plates shall be fabricated from grade
43 steel to BS 4360. Anchor plates shall be accurate in plan size within a
tolerance of minus zero and plus 10mm; the thickness of plate shall be
within normal rolling margins as specified in BS 4360. Anchor plates shall
be sufficiently flat and free from warping to prevent grout from entering at
the bottom of the sleeve (if used). The positions of snugs welded to the
underside of anchor plates shall be accurate within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1.0mm.
5. Washer Plates:
a) The washer plates which are welded to the heads (or bottom nuts) of
smaller diameter bolts to prevent them from turning between the snugs on
the anchor plate shall be grade 43 steel to BS 4360 unless specified
otherwise. Washer plates shall be accurate in plan size within a tolerance
of plus 2mm and minus 3mm and the corners shall be square within a
tolerance of plus or minus 2. The thickness of plate shall be within normal
rolling margins as specified in BS 4360. The plates shall be flat and free
from warping.
6. Washers:
a) Unless specified otherwise standard washers shall be normal diameter
black mild steel washers to BS 4320. Where the holes in the baseplate are
larger than normal clearance holes, special washers will be required to
details shown on the schedules; unless specified otherwise these special
washers shall be fabricated from grade 43 steel to BS 4360.
16.2.1.2 Primer Comply with Section 099113 Part A

A. Finishes Generally:
1. Once applied the finish should not in any way slump, flow, crack, flake, split,
sag, pit, bubble, blister, float, effloresce, craze, shrink, break, wrinkle, or crinkle.

117 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Thinners shall not be added to paint to change in any way its constitution or
consistency unless agreed by International Coatings.
3. All finishes should be durable, of uniform testure and colour and should be
resilient.
4. All finishes should be uniform in texture, colour and appearance within the
limits of the agreed samples and without irregulatiries or distortion. Finish
coatings shall match the colour and gloss of the ageed control samples.
5. There shall be an interval of at least 24 hours between successvie coats of
painting or as recommended by International Coatings.
B. Suitability Of Conditions:
1. Do not apply coatings:
2. To surfaces affected by moisture or frost.
3. Unless the steel temperature is at least 3 degC above the dew point with
conditions stable or improving.
4. Unless the relative humidity is below 85%.
5. When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling.
6. Take all necessary precautions including restrictions on working hours,
providing temporary protection and allowing extra drying time, to ensure that
coatings are not adversely affected by climatic conditions before, during and
after application.
7. Application of coatings will be taken as joint acceptance by the Main Contractor
and Subcontractor of the suitability of surfaces and conditions within any given
area.
C. Applying Coatings:
1. Multiple coats of the same material must be of a different tint to ensure that
each coat provides complete coverage.
2. Apply coatings to clean, dust free, suitably dry surfaces in dry atmospheric
conditions and after any previous coats have cured adequately.
3. Apply coatings evenly to give a smooth finish of uniform thickness and colour,
free from brush marks, nibs, sags, runs and other defects.
4. Keep all surfaces clean and free from dust during coating and drying.
Adequately protect completed work from damage.
D. Film Thickness:
1. Check the thickness of each coat during application using a wet film thickness
wheel or comb gauge in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808
2. After each coat has dried measure the total accumulated dry film thickness
using a magnetic or electromagnetic meter, checked against standard shims
and recalibrated regularly against a smooth steel reference plate, the number
and position of measurements to be as directed by the Engineer. If requested
carry out the testing in the presence of the Engineer. Submit written reports to
the Engineer.
3. Over any square metre of coating the average accumulated dry film thickness
must equal or exceed the specified thickness, with no reading less than 75% of
the specified thickness.

118 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. If at any stage the accumulated dry film thickness is deficient, the Engineer
may require application of additional coat(s) at no extra cost.
5. The Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of the top coat must be sufficient to give an
even, solid, opaque appearance.
6. Where a minimum DFT has been specifiied any areas found to be below the
specified figure will be made good at no extra cost.
E. Stripe Coat
1. Stripe coating of any flanges or edges, external angles, nuts, bolt heads, rough
weld seams, and any areas that are difficult to access is to be carried out by
brush prior to the spray application of the specified primer.
F. Colour Of Top Coat

1. To be selected by the Engineer (unless already specified). Colour of preceding
coat to be as recommended by the paint manufacturer to suit the top coat
colour.
G. Junctions with Concrete:
1. Where exposed steelwork is partially embedded or encased in concrete, apply
two coats of an approved bituminous coating locally to the steel/concrete
junction as instructed by the Engineer.
16.2.1.3 Grout
A. Grouts used for bedding steel bases or bearing plates on concrete foundations
shall be agreed with the Engineer. A high strength, non shrink or expanding type of
proprietary cementitious compound for grouting is required.
B. The Contractor shall design the mix for the grout such that the grout has sufficient
bearing capacity for the loads to be transferred through it.
C. Foundations are to be pre-soaked with water the day prior to grouting of a base
plate.
D. The Contractor is to ensure that prior to pouring the grout the areas is free from
water and debris such as oil, grease or adherent material. If the concrete surface is
defective, it must be cut back to a sound base. Bolt holes are to be blown clean of
dirt.
E. The Contractor must demonstrate that there are no gaps, and that no cracks
develop once the grout has been poured.
16.2.2 Fabrication
A. Structural Steelwork
1. Inform the Engineer when fabrication is due to start 2 weeks before
commencement.
2. Before fabricating, ensure that surface condition of steel which is to be coated
complies with requirements for cleaning given elsewhere in this specification.
3. Ensure that fabrication processes do not cause changes in properties of
materials resulting in non-compliance with specified requirements.
4. Trial assemblies shall be carried out in general and for any large truss elements
in particular.

119 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The size of the assemblages shall be determined by the Contractor to the

approval of the Engineer and shall be sufficient to ensure that fit up and
erection tolerances can be achieved on site.
6. Any material identification marks which have been hard stamped into the
material shall be cut off in the course of fabrication.
7. All measurement shall be made by a steel tape related to a standard tape
which has been certified to be correct at 20C. The tape and the steel to be
measured shall be at the same temperature and proper precautions shall be
taken to tension the tape correctly.
8. All plates, bars and sections shall be flat, straight and free from twist within the
tolerances specified in the relevant British Standard, unless more stringent
tolerances are specified on the Engineer's drawings. Any flattening or
straightening required to achieve the required tolerances or to satisfy fit-up
requirements shall be carried out before any other work is done on that item.
The method adopted for such work shall be such as not to deface or weaken
the material.
B. Thermal Cutting and Machining
1. Steel may be sawn, sheared, cropped or machine flame cut. Where it is
impractical to use machine flame cutting, the use of hand flame cutting shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer, who may require dressing or other
treatment of the cut edges, depending on the details of the joint or member. All
flame cutting shall be subject to agreement.
2. Where notches are necessary they shall have smooth arced internal corners,
produced by drilling holes not less than 20mm diameter before cutting the rest
of the notch or by carefully controlled flame cutting.
3. All burrs left by sawing, cropping or shearing shall be removed before
fabrication or assembly. All sharp arises shall be removed by light grinding.
4. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of members on which he will be using
shearing or flame cutting and in cases where steel so cut is specified as being
subject to dynamic or fatigue loading or liable to brittle fracture, the sheared or
flame cut edges shall be machined to a depth to be agreed by the Engineer.
5. The ends of compression members at splices, caps or bases, dependent on
contact for the transmission of compressive stress, shall be prepared so that
the butting faces are in contact over at least 50% of the bearing area except for
small clearances not exceeding 0.25mm. Over the remaining area the gap shall
not exceed 0.50mm. Base and cap plates and other bearing surfaces shall also
be prepared to the same standard.
6. Members shall be adequately supported in both the vertical and horizontal
planes during cutting or machining to ensure that the prepared ends are square
to the axis of the member.
7. All plates 25 mm thick and over which are to be connected using high strength
friction grip (HSFG) or fully tensioned fasteners shall be checked for bowing or
'ripples'; if these defects are present they shall be eliminated before dispatch to
site.
8. In HSFG or fully tensioned connections all surfaces which have been machined
shall be grit blasted in such a way as to provide a slip factor of not less than
0.45.
9. Fitted Plates and Stiffeners: The ends of fitted plates and stiffeners shall be
accurately sawn or sheared and ground to fit tightly between the flanges or
parts to be stiffened. The maximum gap shall not exceed 0.25 mm.

120 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. Smithed Work: All forging shall be performed in such a manner as not to impair
the strength of the metal. The metal shall not be worked after it has fallen to a
'blue heat'.
11. Baseplates Provide 25 mm diameter holes in all base plates more than 1 m2
in area to allow the escape of air when grouting after erection of columns.
C. BOLT HOLES:
1. Holing shall be in accordance with BS 5950 Part 2 (or BS 4604: Part 1 in the
case of holes for friction grip bolts). All 'burrs' and 'rags' shall be removed.
2. Slotted holes shall either be punched in one operation or else formed by
punching or drilling two round holes and completed by high quality flame cutting
and dressing, to ensure that the bolt can travel the full length of the slot freely.
3. Circular holes for bolts shall not be flame cut.
4. Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular
to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting

bearing loads.
E. SHEAR CONNECTORS:
Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to the relevant
British Standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
F. STEEL WALL-OPENING FRAMING:
Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be
attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and
true members in completed wall framing.
G. HOLES:
Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work
to pass through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut
bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes
perpendicular to steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive
other work.
16.2.3 Shop Connections
A. Bolted Connections
1) Bolting up with Close Tolerance Bolts: Holes for close tolerance bolts shall be
drilled and reamed. Where the holes are not drilled through all thicknesses in
one operation, the parts to be joined together shall be accurately lined up with
parallel drifts of a diameter not greater than the nominal size of the hole and not
smaller than 0.15 mm less than the nominal diameter and the holes then
reamed. A close tolerance bolt shall be fitted in each hole reamed and tightened
before the next hole is reamed. All bolts shall be re-tightened after the last bolt
has been fitted.
2) Bolted Movement Connections: Slotted holes for movement connections shall be
provided with shouldered bolts, spring washers and flat washers.

121 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3) Correcting hole alignments: Drifting to align holes shall not enlarge the holes or
distort the metal. Holes which cannot be aligned without distortion shall be a
cause for rejection unless enlargement by reaming is specifically approved by
the Engineer.
4) Provision of washers:
a) Washers shall be provided at slotted holes and elsewhere as specified. With
metal sprayed steelwork a washer shall always be provided under both head
and nut.
b) Square taper washers shall be provided for all bolts where the bolt head or
nut is bearing on a surface at an angle to the bolt axis greater than 93 or less
than 87.
5) Bolting Metal Sprayed or Galvanised Steelwork: Ordinary bolted connections on
metal sprayed or galvanised steelwork shall be made using spun galvanised or
sheradised bolts, nuts and washers except where connecting coated steelwork
to black steelwork.
B. Weld Connections:
Welding shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of BS 5135 and
American Welding Society (AWS) except as otherwise directed in this Specification and
on the Contract Drawings.
1. The Contractor shall determine the welding procedure details to meet the
requirements of this Specification, including the requirements of Inspection and
Quality Control.
2. Unless otherwise specified, T-butt welds shall be reinforced by equal-leg fillet
welds of leg length equal to a quarter of the thickness of the thinner plate joined,
but not less than 3mm nor greater than 10mm.
3. Where the steelwork is to be blasted and metal sprayed or galvanised after
fabrication, cleats and other solid attachments welded to the member shall be
welded all round to seal the unprotected surface.
4. Except as otherwise specified, the fit up of elements before welding shall
conform to the recommendations for manual welding given in the note in clause
11.1 of BS 5135.
5. The root edges or root faces of butt welds shall not be out of alignment by more
than 15 percent of the thickness of the thinner material but not greater than
3mm.
6. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the
proposed weld procedure details are derived from procedures which have
already been approved. Where weld procedure tests are required to be
performed to demonstrate this, the tests shall be in accordance with BS EN 288.
7. All welders shall be suitably qualified and experienced for the work on which they
are employed and shall have satisfied the relevant requirements of BS EN 287 or
BS 4872: Part 1 as appropriate. The Contractor shall keep records identifying the
welder for each welded joint. Copies of welders' qualifications shall be provided
by the Contractor when requested by the Engineer.
8. Welded attachments for fabrication or erection purposes shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval and shall be clearly shown on the fabrication drawings.
9. Unless otherwise specified, all welds shall not be undersized. Butt welds shall
have a uniform convexity up to a maximum of (weld size/5) or 3mm whichever is
lesser. Concave fillet weld shall have a throat thickness not less than 0.7 times
the specified leg length. Convex fillet welds shall have a throat thickness not
more than 0.9 times the actual leg length. All welds shall have a smooth surface.

122 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10. In addition to the above requirements, all welds on steelwork which is not clad
shall be ground smooth.
11. Site Welding: Site welding is not permitted unless shown on drawings or
otherwise approved. When permitted, the Contractor shall ensure suitable, safe
working conditions. Do not weld when surfaces are wet or when the ambient
temperature is below 0C. A method statement is required for prior review
detailing all procedures for management and control of site welding procedures.
All site welding to be subject to 100% testing.
C. Marking
1. Each piece of steel shall be uniquely identified throughout the fabrication
process.
2. Each piece of steelwork shall be distinctly marked before despatch in
accordance with the marking drawing prepared by the Steelwork Contractor.
Where applicable it shall also be given other marks and symbols to assist
erection at site, by showing from which works it has come and to which crane or
area it is to be delivered.
3. The location of marks on members shall be consistent and shall be such that the
marks are clearly visible both before and after erection.
4. Painted marks shall be applied using a paint that is compatible both in colour and
chemically with the final site anti-corrosion treatment.
5. The method of marking steelwork which is to be supplied to site fully painted
shall, unless specified otherwise, be as agreed with the Engineer.
6. The painting of the Contractor's name or other advertising matter on steelwork is
not permitted. Any such advertisement must be in the form of labels which are to
be removed after the steel arrives on site.
7. The marking of Safe Working Load on runway beams shall comply with BS 2853.
8. Where high strength bolts and threaded rods are used, additional marking must
be visible which will identify the strength of these. The manufacturers standard
markings will suffice provided that they can be easily read on site before the
bolts are fixed.
9. Marking of steel which is to be blast cleaned, pickled, metal sprayed or
galvanised to be by an approved method which cannot be obliterated.
10. Hard stamping must not be used except where specified on the drawings by the
Engineer.
16.2.4 Shop Priming
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially
embedded members to a depth of 50 mm.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation As Per BS:

123 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Steel surfaces shall not be more heavily pitted or rusted than Grade C of
BS 7079 Part A1. Any major surface defects shall be reported to the
Engineer and his instructions followed.
2. Any minor surface defects such as surface laminations, blow holes and
crevices exposed by blast cleaning shall, subject to the approval of the
Engineer, be made good as specified in BS EN 10025, BS EN 10113, BS
EN 10155, BS 7613, BS EN 10210 or BS 7668 as appropriate.
3. Surfaces which become inaccessible after fabrication or assembly, such
as the inside of structural hollow sections and other box sections, shall be
sealed off from the outside atmosphere by continuous welds unless
specified otherwise.
4. Hollow members which are to be galvanised shall have vent holes. These
shall be large enough to ensure internal galvanising or if so specified shall
be sealed after the member has been galvanised.
5. Contact surfaces, other than those where HSFG fasteners are to be used,
shall be treated as required by Specification of Corrosion Protection. The
Contractor shall check the faying surfaces in steel 25 mm thick or more for
deformities such as bowing, twist or rippling which may reduce slip factor
to below design limit. The contractor shall agree remedial measures with
the Engineer.
6. Where specified on the drawings machined surfaces shall receive an
approved coat of travel varnish within four hours of machining.
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Use priming methods that result in full coverage
of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after
assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from
first.
D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat
Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 0.038 mm.
16.2.5 Galvanizing
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating according to Section 099113 Part A
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will
function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
Revise locations below where galvanizing is required to suit Project. Subparagraph
is an example only; delete and indicate items to be galvanized on Drawings if
preferred.
16.2.6 Source Quality Control
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the relevant British Standards.

B. Constituent materials shall be obtained from suppliers operating quality systems in
accordance with either ISO 9001 or an in-house system approved by Engineer.
C. If it is found necessary to substitute alternative sections for any of the steel sections
specified then the written approval of the Engineer for the substitution and for the

124 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
amendments to the detailed drawing showing the substitution shall be obtained

before fabrication is commenced.
D. Lamination Testing
1) Except in the case of special plate with through thickness properties
guaranteed by the manufacturer, all plates and sections 25mm or over in
thickness shall be ultrasonically tested for laminations, and shall meet the
acceptance criteria of level B6 to BS 5996.
2) Other plates may be specified to be ultrasonically tested for laminations. Unless
otherwise specified they shall meet the requirements of level B6 to BS 5996.
3) Welded joints that cause high tensile through thickness strains to occur (as
discussed in Appendix G of BS 5135), shall be fabricated from steel that meets
the quality level Z35 of BS EN 10164.
4) For all steel plates and sections which will be subject to through-thickness
stresses, the Contractor shall carry out non-destructive testing on the steel to
ensure that the affected zones are free from laminations and inclusions. Table
5,18 and 19 of BS 5135 shall be used to determine acceptance levels for steel
products.
E. Welding shall meet the requirements stated in subsection Materials - Welding and
shall be subject to the inspection and testing requirements stated in subsection
Inspection and Quality Control.
16.3.1 Examination
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing

surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for
compliance with requirements.
B. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and
other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16.3.2 Preparation
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction
loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports
when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until
cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
16.3.3 Erection
A. Method of Erection
1) The Contractor shall submit a detailed Method Statement to the Engineer for
approval prior to erection. When necessary to amplify the information given in his
Method Statement, the Contractor shall prepare Erection Drawings for approval
by the Engineer.

125 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Erection of the steelwork shall be carried out in a safe manner and the work shall
be arranged in such a manner as to facilitate phased hand over of the steelwork
for subsequent operations.
B. The Contractor shall supply adequate plant, tools, service bolts, drifts, bolt
tightening devices and other equipment to ensure that the steelwork is correctly
erected in accordance with the programme.
C. Transport, Storage, Handling and Attachments
1) Care shall be taken when transporting, storing, handling or erecting all material
to ensure that no part is damaged. Damage to any part of the structure either
before or during erection shall immediately be brought to the notice of the
Engineer. Damaged material shall be rectified or replaced. No part that has been
damaged shall be assembled into the structure without the written approval of
the Engineer.
2) Steelwork to be stored shall not be placed directly on the ground. It shall be
stored in such a manner as to avoid water retention.
3) Particular care shall be taken when transporting, handling or storing parts which
have been metal sprayed, galvanised or painted. If the coating is damaged it
shall be restored to comply with the relevant requirements of the Specification for
Corrosion Protection for Steelwork.
4) Lifting points shall be suitably wrapped and protected and steel slings shall not
be allowed to come into direct contact with coated steelwork.
5) Welded attachments shall not be employed unless they are clearly shown on the
fabrication drawings.
D. Foundations
1) All the necessary anchorage materials which are to be built into the foundations
shall be supplied to site in time to meet the agreed programme.
2) Immediately the foundations are available the Contractor shall satisfy himself
that the foundations have been correctly formed and that the holding down bolts
have been accurately set and have the full amount of play shown on the
drawings and shall inform the Engineer accordingly, in writing.
E. Temperature Effect
1) In setting out and erecting continuous structures proper adjustments shall be
made as approved by the Engineer to counteract dimensional discrepancies
owing to temperature variations.
2) Where stanchion bases are to be cast into pockets formed in concrete
foundations, any horizontal steel members which tie the stanchions together
shall be fixed first and the stanchions shall then be lined, levelled, plumbed and
concreted in and the concrete in the pockets allowed to harden before fixing the
rest of the steelwork to them.
3) Except where specified otherwise, sliding joints shall be treated with
molybdenum disulphide grease before erection.
4) The Contractor shall limit the temperature effects during erection by adequately
controlling the temperature of the element using thermal insulation or an
alternative system approved by the Engineer. He shall demonstrate that the
change in temperature of any element or elements shall not cause undue effects
on the structure
F. Lining and Levelling
1) The permanent welding or bolting up of connections shall not be carried out until
a sufficient portion of the structure has been erected and temporarily connected

126 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
up, to ensure that there will be no straining of members during the erection and
lining up of the remainder of the structure.
2) Adequate temporary bracing shall be provided and left in position until such time
as the building is sufficiently far advanced for such bracing to be no longer
required.
3) Packs for levelling up stanchions shall be shown on the drawings submitted for
the Engineer's approval. At least three sets of packs shall be used for each
stanchion. The number of packs provided shall be 25% in excess of the
theoretical requirement.
4) Packs shall not be larger than is necessary for their purpose, they shall be sawn
and not sheared or flame cut. Packs shall not protrude unduly from the stanchion
base; they shall be grouted in and the grout shall totally enclose them.
G. Grouting up of Structures
1) The Engineer shall be informed when stanchions or other members have been
lined, levelled and plumbed and no grouting or concreting-in shall be done until
the Engineer has approved the alignment and plumbing.
2) Following such approval the Contractor shall immediately grout the base plates
and concrete in the stanchions or other members.
H. Composite Columns
1) Welding to Concrete Filled Columns: Primary load bearing structural components
shall be welded to the column before commencing to fill with concrete. Subject to
the approval of the Engineer, the welding of relatively small lugs and fittings after
filling may be allowed.
2) Column Welded Splices: To allow welding to take place, the concrete filling shall
be stopped at a level approximately 250mm below the top of the column. The
next column length can then be spliced into place using a full penetration butt
weld with a backing ring. Following this, concrete filling can be resumed.
3) Bolted Flange Joints: When a flanged connection is used, the flange shall be
welded to the column before filling. When flanges are used at both ends of a
column length at least one flange shall have to incorporate an aperture for filling.
In order to ensure complete filling under this flange, the maximum size of any lip
shall not exceed 15mm
4) Preparation for Concrete Placi
a) Surfaces to receive concrete shall conform to Specification for Corrosion
Protection for Steelwork: Internal - Concrete encased.
b) All loose material and debris shall be removed from the bottom of the column.
Any free water which may have collected at the bottom shall also be
removed.
5) Placing and Compacting the Concrete in Composite Tube Columns:
a) The Contractor shall submit a detailed Method Statement to the Engineer for
approval prior to construction.
b) The Contractor shall conduct a full scale test on site to the satisfaction of the
Engineer to demonstrate the proposed method of filling, compaction and
making good.
c) Comply with pertinent provisions of Specification for Cast-in Place Concrete.
d) The columns shall be concrete filled by pumping concrete into the column
through temporary ports in the base of the column. The Contractor shall
design, fabricate, install, remove and make good the opening and works
associated with the temporary ports.

127 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
e) The concrete filling method shall ensure compaction of the concrete during
placing.
f) Drain holes that are present in the column to prevent build up of water on site
and to allow escape of moisture in the event of fire shall be temporarily
plugged whilst the concrete is being placed. The plugs shall be removed after
the concrete has achieved its initial set.
g) Polythene sheeting shall be placed over the top and tied or taped around the
column to prevent early drying out of the concrete at the top surface.
16.3.4 Field Connections
A. HSFG Bolted Connections

1) Care shall be taken to ensure that all HSFG bolts, nuts, washers etc. are
maintained in good condition. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the
threads of bolts and nuts are free from damage, grit, corrosion or any condition
necessitating excessive torque to obtain the required tension. The Engineer's
approval shall be obtained before lubricating the threads should this be
necessary. Care must be taken in applying lubricant to the threads as it is
essential that no lubricant gets between the contacting surfaces of the steelwork.
Plumber's Tallow is recommended for this purpose; oil shall not be used.
2) The faying surfaces shall be prepared to achieve a slip-factor of not less than
0.45. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with this requirement in
accordance with the BS 4604 test method. Galvanised and metal sprayed
surfaces shall always be lightly grit blasted. Painted surfaces shall be prepared
in accordance with Section G2 - Metal Coatings and the Corrosion Protection
Schedule.
3) Assembly shall be in accordance with BS 4604: Part 1. The faying surfaces shall
be kept completely dry for assembly.
4) General grade HSFG shall be tightened by the Part-Torque, Part-Turn method in
accordance with the procedure described in System A below or by using load
indicating washers in accordance with the procedure described in system B
below.
5) System A - Part-torque, Part-turn Method of Tightening
a) After assembly all the bolts in the joint shall be tightened with the required
bedding torque, to ensure that the parts of the joint are brought into good
contact with each other, using a calibrated tightening device such as a break-
back spanner or a torque controlled impact wrench.
b) The appropriate values of the bedding torque to be used in each case will
depend on the actual conditions of the bolts and other factors and will be
agreed with the Engineer in each case. It may be necessary to conduct trials
on site and facilities shall be made available by the Contractor for this
purpose.
c) During the tightening of any one joint, the first few bolts tightened may relax
and it may be necessary to tighten each bolt more than once until the bedding
down torque is achieved.
d) After bedding down, the parts joined together must be in close contact over
their full area, with no signs of distortion in any of the parts. This stage of
tightening is not intended as a corrective for faulty workmanship in the
assembled plies.
e) After bedding down the joint each nut and bolt shall be permanently marked
with a cold chisel on one side of the nut and on the protruding thread of the

128 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bolt in one continuous line. This marking is to record their subsequent relative
positions.
f) Before final tightening is carried out the Engineer shall be informed so that he
may check that the bolts have been correctly bedded down.
g) A tolerance of +20% on the specified bedding down torque will be permitted
to allow for slight variations in the calibration of the devices used for
tightening and checking.
h) When permission to proceed has been obtained from the Engineer the bolts
shall be further tightened so that the nut is turned relative to the bolt shank by
the amount given in Table 3 of BS4604 Part 1.
i) After completion of the turn of the nut the Engineer shall be informed so that
he may check that the nut has been turned the correct amount relative to the
bolt.
6) System B - Tightening using Load Indicating Washers
a) The load indicating washers shall be used in conjunction with HSFG bolts
manufactured in accordance with BS4395 Part 1.
b) The Contractor shall ensure that the load indicating washers do not jam on
the shanks of the bolts. This can be checked before installation by placing the
load indicating washer upside down on the bolt (i.e. with the protrusions away
from the bolt head). If the washer does not turn freely on the shank right up to
the underside of the bolt head, the washer or the bolt, whichever is at fault,
shall be rejected.
c) The load indicating washer shall preferably by fitted with the protrusions
bearing against the bolt head. If this is not possible, it may be fitted against a
special nut face washer fitted against the nut.
d) Where a hardened taper washer is necessary the bolt shall preferably be
fitted in such a way that the taper washer can be placed between the nut and
the steelwork or, if this is not possible, the taper washer may be placed
between the load indicating washer and the steelwork.
e) Where the load indicating washer is fitted under the head of the bolt care
must be taken that the head of the bolt does not turn during tightening.
f) Where it is necessary to use the special nut face washers the manufacturers
instructions on assembly shall be carefully followed to ensure proper
functioning of the load indicating washer in this position.
g) No methods other than the above shall be used.
h) After assembly all the bolts in the joint shall be tightened to a "snug tight"
condition, to ensure that the parts of the joint are brought into good contact
with each other. Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few
impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using a spanner.
Alternatively the bolts shall be tightened to a specified bedding torque as in
System A, subsections a. and b.
i) During the tightening of any one joint, the first few bolts tightened may relax
and it may be necessary to tighten each bolt more than once until the bedding
down torque is achieved.
j) After bedding down, the parts joined together must be in close contact over
their full area, with no signs of distortion in any of the parts. This stage of
tightening is not intended as a corrective for faulty workmanship in the
assembled plies.
k) Before final tightening is carried out the Engineer shall be informed so that he
may check that the bolts have been correctly bedded down.

129 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
l) When permission to proceed has been obtained from the Engineer each bolt
shall be further tightened so that the average gap is reduced to 0.40 mm
maximum in normal assemblies or 0.25 mm maximum against a nut face
washer. The gaps shall not be reduced to less than 0.10 mm.
m) After completion of the tightening the Engineer shall be informed so that he
can check that the gaps have been closed to within the limits.
n) The time, torque and amount of turn required to obtain the specified gap shall
be observed and these should remain substantially constant for similar bolts.
o) Where excessive time or turn or unusual force is required to reduce the gap
the reason for this shall be sought and rectified before proceeding with the
work.
7) High Strength Bearing Type joints.
a) For bearing type joints an applied finish on the contact finishes shall be
permitted.
b) The procedure for tightening bearing type joints shall be the same as for
HSFG bolts.
8) Tightening of Galvanised or Plated Nuts and Bolts a) Care shall be taken to
ensure that coating materials do not strip off and jam the threads as this will give
a false indication of torque.
9) In the case of contact surfaces of HSFG bolted connections receive paint, slip
resistant test shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Site Bolting
1) All sites bolting shall meet the relevant requirements stated in this
Specification.
2) Bolting up and final tightening of bolts shall be carried out progressively as
the erection, alignment and grouting proceeds in order to release the
steelwork and the area under it for subsequent operations.
3) Care shall be taken not to damage bolts by over-tightening.
C. Site Welding
1) Where site welding is required the requirements stated in subsection
Fabrication - Welding shall be met and the welding shall be subject to the
inspection and testing requirements stated in subsection Inspection and
Quality Control. Special attention shall be paid to the safety of welders
working on site.
2) Due precautions shall be taken against inclement weather. Welding shall not
be carried out during rain except under cover and with adequate protection
against ingress of water to the zone to be welded. Electrodes shall be kept
dry and stored in an appropriate environment.
3) Gas shielded welding shall only be carried out with adequate protection from
wind and draughts.
D. Co-ordination with other trades
1. The erection of the structural steelwork shall be co-ordinated with all trades
and parties involved and it shall not delay to the overall building programme.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating information between his
Sub-Contractors to allow production of steelwork to proceed according to
programme.
2. The Contractor shall not cut, drill or otherwise alter the work of other trades,
or his own work to accommodate other trades unless such work is clearly
specified on the drawings. Whenever such alteration is required, written

130 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
acceptance from the Contract Administrator shall be obtained for details of

such alterations.
E. Installation of Holding Down Bolts
1. The Contractor shall provide such temporary or permanent supports as are
necessary to ensure that all bolts are cast in position within the requirements
of this Specification. All bolts shall be held rigidly in position at top and
bottom. Permanent supports which project outside the finished concrete shall
be cut away to the Engineer's approval. Steel templates with supports
independent of the shuttering or reinforcement shall be used for bolts
exceeding 48mm diameter and/or length exceeding 1 metre.
2. The Contractor shall provide plugs at the top of bolt sleeves to prevent
ingress of debris into the sleeve and to prevent any washer of lesser diameter
than the sleeve from falling into the sleeve.
3. The levels of the tops of all holding down bolts shall be accurate within a
tolerance of minus zero and plus 12mm.
4. When the bolts have been cast in, the bolt threads and the nut shall either be
coated with grease as specified in the subsection Delivery, Storage and
Handling and then wrapped with a suitable thickness of flexible PVC sheeting
to BS 1763, properly tied on, or else wrapped with two layers of Denso tape.
5. Once cast in position, bolts shall be protected by the Contractor against
damage from any source until hand over. Where it is necessary for vehicles to
run over areas where there are projecting bolts, the Engineer may direct the
Contractor to provide temporary mass concrete, timber sleepers, or other
suitable approved provisions to protect the bolts against damage.
6. Bolts Rigidly Cast In
a) Where holding down bolts are cast rigidly into concrete, unless a greater
degree of accuracy is called for on the drawings, the position of the centre
of the bolt in plan at any level within the length of the bolts shall be
accurate within a circle of 6mm diameter, the centre of which is on the
intersection of the true ordinates of the bolt.
b) Unless a greater degree of accuracy is called for on the drawings bolts
shall not deviate from a plumb line by a slope greater than 1 in 150.
7. Bolts in Sleeves
a) The position of the centre line of the bolt in plan at the top and bottom and
at any level within the length of the bolt shall be accurate within the
tolerances given in Table 2 or Table 3 as appropriate. After the bolts have
been concreted in and the top has been pulled over to its true position, the
slope specified in the appropriate table shall not be exceeded.
b) Where tolerances to Table 3 are required, this will be indicated on the
Engineer's drawings, otherwise Table 2 applies.
c) The centre line of the bolt shall be free to move laterally at the top of the
bolt within a circle of 30mm diameter, the centre of which is at the
specified position of the bolt.
d) Other Requirements
e) The Contractor shall survey the holding down bolts and other encast
elements and manufacture templates to ensure proper fit-up when the
steelwork is erected. Oversize holes shall be provided in the bolt boxes to
facilitate erection.
f) Holding down bolts may be cast solidly into the concrete without sleeves.
A bituminous coating may be applied to the bolts to facilitate prestressing

131 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
by the Contractor. During pre-stressing, jacking shall be repeated until it

has been demonstrated that relaxation of shear stresses within the
bituminous coating has taken place.
Table 2 Positional Tolerance for Holding Down Bolts in Sleeves for slab type base plates.
Table 3 Positional Tolerance for Holding Down Bolts in Sleeves - for thick castings and for
base plates where the bolts pass through holes at two levels.
F. Electrical Continuity for Lightning Protection

1. All structural steel elements shall be electrically continuous and connected to
the concrete reinforcement by means of a flexible copper earth bond.
2. The system and its installation shall comply with BS 6651.
G. Column Bases
1. The Contractor to raise or lower the steelwork to the levels specified on the
drawing(s) using sawn steel packs or folding wedges not larger than
necessary for the purpose.
2. The packs shall be positioned symmetrically around perimeter of base plate.
The Contractor to avoid using single central pack.

132 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the space beneath any column
base is less than 10mm or over 40 mm greater than the specified dimension.
4. The Contractor to check accuracy of erection and correct all errors before
filling and bedding beneath bases and carrying out any other adjacent work.
H. Mortar Filling/Bedding of Column Bases
1. The bolt pockets shall be completely filled with a neat cement slurry and the
space beneath column base plates with grout or mortar as follows:
2. Spaces 25 to 50 mm deep: Mortar of 1:1 cement: sand, just fluid enough to
pour and well tamped as filling proceeds.
3. Spaces 50 to 80 mm deep: Damp mortar of 1:2 cement: sand, well tamped
against properly fixed supports as filling proceeds.
4. Cement: Portland cement to BS 12, Class 42.5N or Class 52.5N.
5. Sand: To BS 882, Grading limit M.
I. Movement Joints
1. The sliding surfaces shall be coated with molybdenum disulphide grease
before connecting.
2. The Contractor to ensure that bolts are in centre of slotted holes after erection
of structure and that the joint is free to move.
16.3.5 Field Quality Control
A. Supervision & Inspection Of Welding

1. Only certified welders can be employed to carry out welding work.
2. The contractor shall appoint welding supervisors whose competence and
qualifications shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and all welding
work shall be carried out under their direction.
3. The contractor shall co-ordinate his activities so that all inspection work can be
carried out before the removal of scaffolding and before the welds are covered
by painting or field coating.
B. Testing Of Welds
1. The whole of the total length of each full strength butt weld shall be examined
by radiography or other approved non-destructive testing method and approved
by the Engineer. Non-destructive tests are to be carried out on all other major
welds by the contractor and he shall carry out radiographic examination if
instructed by the Engineer.
2. Defective welding revealed by testing shall be made good to the satisfaction of
the Engineer at the cost of the contractor.
C. Criteria for Tests

1. Visual examinations One hundred percent (100%) of the welded joints,
2. Ultrasonic or drilling method One drill hole for 50 m of welded joint and not
less than 50 mm for each 50 m of welded joints,
3. X-ray and Gamma-ray examination Two per cent (2%) of the length of weld
made by manual or semi-automatic machines and One per cent (1%) of the
weld if made by automatic welding machines (flux welding, shielded arc
welding, electro-slag automatic welding). However, important joints such as the
joint between two tapering girders located near the inclined column-support

133 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
shall be tested beyond these limits 10% of the length of the weld shall be
tested.
D. Lamination Testing
1. Except in the case of special plate with through thickness properties
guaranteed by the manufacturer, all plates and sections 25mm or over in
thickness shall be ultrasonically tested for laminations, and shall meet the
acceptance criteria of level B6 to BS 5996.
2. Other plates may be specified to be ultrasonically tested for laminations. Unless
otherwise specified they shall meet the requirements of level B6 to BS 5996.
3. Welded joints that cause high tensile through thickness strains to occur (as
discussed in Appendix G of BS 5135), shall be fabricated from steel that meets
the quality level Z35 of BS EN 10164.
4. For all steel plates and sections which will be subject to through-thickness
stresses, the Contractor shall carry out non-destructive testing on the steel to
ensure that the affected zones are free from laminations and inclusions. Table
5, 18 and 19 of BS 5135 shall be used to determine acceptance levels for steel
products.
a. Setting out and Erection Tolerances
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct positioning and the
correct levels of the structure.
c. Unless otherwise specified the tolerances for position and level of the
steelwork shall be:

134 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

135 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

136 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Profile Steel Floor Decking:

Deviation of dimension between deck edge trim and perimeter beam.
Note: Deviation (as shown) between actual beam centreline and intended beam
centreline arises from other permitted tolerances.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the steelwork is erected within the above
tolerances prior to any work being undertaken by following on trades. The Contractor
shall obtain approval of methods of rectification before starting modification or remedial
work.
E. As Erected Drawings
F. A detailed survey of erected steelwork levels is to be carried out by the Contractor
not more than 4 weeks after the erection of steelwork and prior to the
commencement of works by following contractors.
G. The Contractor shall submit survey information to the Engineer for review allowing
10 working days for their review.
H. On completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with CD
ROM (AutoCAD 2005 format) and a set of paper prints of As Erected drawings
comprising:
a. General arrangement drawings.
b. Fabrication drawings
c. Drawings made after fabrication revisions.
d. The fabrication drawing register.
1. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that full records are
maintained through all stages of the work and these records shall be freely
available for inspection by the Engineer or his representatives at any time.
2. The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and an independent inspection
authority access at any reasonable time to his works and to those of any
suppliers to enable inspection of the work to be carried out during fabrication.
The Contractor shall provide all facilities, hand tools, lighting etc as necessary
to ensure adequate inspection.
3. The inspection and acceptance of materials and fixings, etc, by the Engineer
shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his own responsibilities for
ensuring that the materials and fixings are sound and of the requisite quality.
4. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 14 days prior to completion of the
fabrication of the elements in order that, if necessary, inspections or tests may

137 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
be carried out by the Engineer at the Contractors works prior to despatch of

steelwork to site.
5. All welds which are uneven in size or are oversized shall be rejected if in the
opinion of the Engineer they will prove unsuitable in their final state. All such
welds shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
I. Inspection and Testing of Welding

1. The Contractor shall undertake to carry out his own in-house quality control to
prove and maintain the quality of the fabrication to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractors attention is drawn to the following:
a. The Engineer shall nominate an independent inspection agency to monitor
the quality control of all work carried out. All such related costs shall be
deemed to be included in the tender sum. Approval by the Engineer of the
nominated inspection agency shall be sought at the tender pre-award stage.
b. Prior to commencing all fabrication, the Contractor shall attend a pre-
fabrication meeting with the inspection agency and the Engineer to
determine the acceptability of the in-house testing and the details of the
welder approvals and weld procedures required together with other relevant
matters.
c. Where the Engineer requires any tests to be carried out that are not
provided for in this Specification, such tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor, but the costs are to be met by the Contractor only if the
materials or construction are not in accordance with the Specification.
d. The results of all tests and inspections shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review.
2. The Contractor shall carry out inspection and testing of welding to meet the
requirements and recommendations of BS 5135, except as otherwise directed in
the Specification and on the Contract Drawings. Welds shall be inspected and
tested in accordance with Tables 4 and 5. Testing procedures shall be in
accordance with BS 2600, BS 2910, BS 3923 or equivalent approved.
3. All welds shall have 100 percent visual inspection to BS 5289 in addition to the
requirements given in this Specification and Contract Drawings.
4. Inspection and testing by the Contractor shall be carried out by suitably qualified
and experienced staff to the approval of the Engineer and all in accordance with
the relevant British Standards listed in this Specification. Testing shall be carried
out by an independent and accredited laboratory approved by the Engineer.
16.3.6 Inspection and Quality Control
A. General
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all inspection and testing in
accordance with this Specification.
2. In the event that materials or workmanship fail to comply with the requirements
of this Specification any further inspection and testing which is necessary to
satisfy the Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Testing
laboratories shall be accredited where appropriate.
3. Additional inspection and testing may be required by the Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that full records are
maintained through all stages of the work and these records shall be freely
available for inspection by the Engineer or his representatives at any time.

138 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and an independent inspection authority
access at any reasonable time to his works and to those of any suppliers to
enable inspection of the work to be carried out during fabrication. The Contractor
shall provide all facilities, hand tools, lighting etc as necessary to ensure
adequate inspection.
6. The inspection and acceptance of materials and fixings, etc, by the Engineer
shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his own responsibilities for ensuring
that the materials and fixings are sound and of the requisite quality.
7. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 14 days prior to completion of the
fabrication of the elements in order that, if necessary, inspections or tests may
be carried out by the Engineer at the Contractors works prior to despatch of
steelwork to site.
8. All welds which are uneven in size or are oversized shall be rejected if in the
opinion of the Engineer they will prove unsuitable in their final state. All such
welds shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
B. Inspection and Testing of Welding

1. The Contractor shall undertake to carry out his own in-house quality control to
prove and maintain the quality of the fabrication to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractors attention is drawn to the following:
a. The Engineer shall nominate an independent inspection agency to monitor
the quality control of all work carried out. All such related costs shall be
deemed to be included in the tender sum. Approval by the Engineer of the
nominated inspection agency shall be sought at the tender pre-award stage.
b. Prior to commencing all fabrication, the Contractor shall attend a pre-
fabrication meeting with the inspection agency and the Engineer to
determine the acceptability of the in-house testing and the details of the
welder approvals and weld procedures required together with other relevant
matters.
c. Where the Engineer requires any tests to be carried out that are not
provided for in this Specification, such tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor, but the costs are to be met by the Contractor only if the
materials or construction are not in accordance with the Specification.
d. The results of all tests and inspections shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review.
Weld Category Requirements
Normal - All welds unless The weld shall not be undersize. Butt welds shall have a
otherwise stated below uniform convexity up to a maximum of weld size/5 or 3mm
whichever is the lesser. Concave fillet welds shall have a
throat thickness not less than 0.7 times the specified leg
length. Convex fillet welds shall have a throat thickness not
more than 0.9 times the actual leg length. All welds shall
have a smooth surface.
Special - All welds on The above requirements apply. In addition, all welds shall
steelwork which is not clad be ground smooth.
2. The Contractor shall carry out inspection and testing of welding to meet the
requirements and recommendations of BS 5135, except as otherwise directed
in the Specification and on the Contract Drawings. Welds shall be inspected

139 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
and tested in accordance with Tables 4 and 5. Testing procedures shall be in

accordance with BS 2600, BS 2910, BS 3923 or equivalent approved.
3. All welds shall have 100 percent visual inspection to BS 5289 in addition to the
requirements given in this Specification and Contract Drawings.
4. Inspection and testing by the Contractor shall be carried out by suitably
qualified and experienced staff to the approval of the Engineer and all in
accordance with the relevant British Standards listed in this Specification.
Testing shall be carried out by an independent and accredited laboratory
approved by the Engineer.
5. Every facility shall be given to the Engineer or his representatives or such
inspector or testing agencies as he may appoint to visit at all reasonable times
all places where work is being carried out and to inspect and test the steelwork
during all stages of preparation, fabrication and trial assembly.
6. Requirements for Inspection & Testing of Welds (& Steel Products at Zones
Subject to Through Thickness Stresses) in accordance with BS EN 1011-
2:2001 and BS EN 10111:2009
7. When trial assembly is specified it shall be carried out in the Contractor's works
to the extent required by the Engineer to prove the accuracy of the
workmanship.
8. When parts which have to fit together are manufactured in different works or for
any reason cannot be matched before despatch to the site, the Contractor shall
make adequate provision to ensure a correct fit by providing checking jigs or
other suitable means satisfactory to the Engineer.
9. A minimum of 5 working days advance notice shall be given to the Engineer of
the Contractor's intention of making a trial assembly.
10. When random (less than 100 percent) volumetric non-destructive testing of
welds is specified, it shall be ensured that the positions tested are fully
representative of all aspects of the welding.
11. The particular method of non-destructive weld testing, selected by the
Contractor, shall be sufficiently sensitive to allow the proper detection of
defects and interpretation of results appropriate to the quality category.
12. When random (less than 100 percent) volumetric non-destructive testing of
welds reveals unacceptable defects in a joint, all previously untested joints in
the group represented shall be tested until it is established to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that the cause of the defects has been demonstrated and the
defects eliminated. This may require 100 percent testing.
13. Any work which does not comply with the requirements of this Specification
shall be rectified promptly to the satisfaction of the Engineer including any
further inspection and testing which he requires.
14. Inspection by the Engineer or his representative shall not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility to perform his own quality control operations to ensure that
all work meets the Specification nor of his responsibility to rectify all defects
including any which appear or are found subsequently.
15. Copies of welding inspection reports shall be provided by the Contractor when
requested by the Engineer.
16. All tests to be carried out by a NAMAS accredited laboratory.
B. Inspection and Testing of Shear Stud Welding

1. All studs shall be visually inspected. They shall show a full 360 collar.

140 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. At locations agreed with the Engineer a minimum of 5% of studs shall have a

bend test.
3. The bend test shall be made by striking the head of the stud with a 6 kg
hammer until it is displaced laterally a distance of about one quarter the height
of the stud. The stud weld shall not show any signs of cracking or lack of fusion.
4. Studs subjected to the bend test shall not be straightened.
5. Defective Studs
a. Studs with defective welding shall be removed by flame cutting or gouging
at a point not less than 3 mm from the surface of the parent material.
b. The residual stud material shall be ground flush and the affected area
visually inspected. When thickness of the parent material is greater than
20 mm it shall also be checked by magnetic particle inspection.
c. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with the Specification.
d. Studs shall not be removed by hammering.
C. Testing Runway Beams, Trolley Beams and Supports for Permanently Installed
Suspended Access Equipment
1. The testing of runway beams shall be carried out in accordance with BS 2853
and all statutory requirements. The Steelwork Contractor shall provide all
labour, materials and equipment necessary for the test. When the runway
beams are ready for testing the Engineer shall be informed and the tests shall
be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his representative and all
relevant approval bodies, including the Health and Safety Executive and
Insurance Representatives.
2. Trolley beams for window cleaning trolleys and the like shall be tested as
runway beams.
3. Supports for Permanently Installed Suspended Access Equipment shall be
tested to meet the requirements of BS 6037.
4. All beams and supports shall be marked to show the safe working load where
this is not clearly indicated on the lifting equipment itself.
D. Products
1. A copy of tests certificates for all project steelwork is to be retained by the
Contractor for review by the Engineer upon request.
16.3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Defective Work. As soon as possible after any part of the work or any materials are
known or suspected to be defective, submit proposals to the Engineer for further
testing, inspection or replacement and obtain instructions.
16.3.8 Post weld cleaning and finishing of stainless steels
To ensure good technical and aesthetic success of the welds in the project, it will be request
the realization of all the mock up necessary to properly define the correct degree of finish.
A. Removing heat tint

141 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Heat tint from stainless steel fabrications shall be remove using brush-on
pastes or gels, spray or immersion acid pickling or electrolytic methods will
normally be satisfactory.
2. The nitric acid used in these treatments will also leave the steel surface in the
'passive' condition.
3. A combination of finishing techniques may be needed, especially as nitric acid

treatments alone cannot be relied on to remove sufficient metal from the
surface. This may include mechanical treatments (grinding or abrading)
followed by nitric acid cleaning (passivation).passivation of stainless steels
4. (It is important to follow the preparation supplier's instructions, as excessive

contact times with these hydrofluoric acid containing products can result in
pitting damage to the stainless steel.)
5. For surface finishes, for aesthetic appearance or to further optimise corrosion

resistance, then final electropolishing shall be used.
6. It is important to consider the inside weld faces of fabrications. Although these

area may be out of sight, they are intended to be in direct contact with the
service environment for which the stainless steel was selected.
Even though weld backing gas systems may have been used, post weld heat
tint removal in these areas is mandatory.
END OF SECTION

142 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 SECTION 05 73 05 - Exterior Glass - Balustrade Glazing
Work in this Section includes:
A. Provide balustrade work shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as

needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Coordinate balustrade work of this section with General Conditions and

Supplementary Conditions.
Location
Grade Level Secondary Shelter


Defence Department.

version:
B. Section 25 Glass and glazing
1. BS 952 Glass for glazing

143 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. BS 1494 Fixing accessories for building purposes

3. BS 5544 Anti-bandit glazing (glazing resistant to manual attack)
4. BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design and construction of buildings
5. BS 6206 Impact performance requirements for flat safety glass and
safety plastics for use in buildings
6. BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing for buildings
7. BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites
8. BS EN 572 Glass in Buildings - Basic soda lime silica glass products
C. Section 17 Part 4 Architectural metal work

1. BS 729 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel artivles
2. BS 970 Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes
3. BS 1387 Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and plain end
steel tubes suitable for welding or for screwing to BS 12 threads
4. BS 1471 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
engineering purposes
engineering purposes - forging stock
engineering purposes-bars, extruded round tubes and sections
7. BS 1490 Aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots and castings for general
8. BS 1615 Method for specifying adonic oxidation coatings for general
9. BS 2997 Aluminium rainwater goods
10. BS 4360 Weldable structural steels
11. BS 6180 Protective barriers in and about buildings
12. BS 6323 Seamless and welded steel tubes for automobile, mechanical
and general engineering purposes
4.5.17.1 Balustrades should be designed to resist a horizontal load of at least 0.5 KN/m
(according to DIN 1055.3) without unacceptable deflections and distortions.
4.13.1.2 Safety: Non-combustible and Non-Toxic conforming to all applicable standards and
codes to meet or exceed the appropriate standards
4.13.1.3 Economy: Cost-effective and, to a consistent level of quality, commonly available and
not restricted to a few suppliers based on current industry levels of technology and
local building practice. Proven in use, they will not required new research, designs or
manufacturing techniques.
4.13.1.4 Durability: Materials shall be carefully selected for their wear, strength and weathering
qualities. They are to be resistant to abrasion, impact, vandalism, humidity,
temperature change, sunlight and the marine atmosphere. Colour and appearance
shall remain unchanged during the life cycle of the material.

144 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.13.1.6 Maintainability: Materials shall be easily cleaned, in a single operation, with standard
cleaning equipment and agents. Repair and replacement with regards to the
availability of material in the region shall be considered in the selection of materials.
4.13.6.1 Finish materials on walls and columns within reach of public shall be highly resistant to
wear and vandalism. The internal wall finishes shall be of a panel system that is
supported either from the top of the bottom. The fixings shall be resistant to vibration
and insensitive to wind or train generated pressure fluctuation, i.e. no rattling,
squeaking, etc.
4.13.6.2 Provisions shall be made for replacement in case of damage, e.g. individual panels
shall be demountable for purposes of maintenance, cleaning and replacement without
necessitating the removal of adjacent panels.
4.13.6.3 Wall finishes at exposed levels shall be capable of withstanding a 1.5 kN applied point
load according to the technical specifications.
4.14.13.6 Non-reflecting surfaces in the room shall be of the following reflectance degrees:
a) Ceiling 70 %
i. Walls 50 %
ii. Partition Walls 20-50%
5.5.4.1 Vertical Deflection Limits: The final deflection due to all loads including the effects of
temperature, creep and shrinkage shall be measured from the as-cast level of the
supports of floors, roofs and all other horizontal members and should not exceed the
ratio of (span)/250.
3

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
3

145 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17.1.2.6 Leadership In Energy And Environmental Design (LEED) Compliance


Labelling).


components.
17.1.2.7 LEED Required Documents

project site.
1. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
2. 01 00 00 General requirements

146 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



- ASTM E 894 -Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings;
- ASTM E 935 -Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings ;
- EN410-2011 - Glass in building. Determination of luminous and solar characteristics
of glazing;
- EN673-2011 - Glass in building. Determination of thermal transmittance (U value).
Calculation method;
- EN572-9:2004 - Glass in building. Basic soda lime silicate glass products. Evaluation of
conformity/Product standard;
- ISO 9001-2000 - Quality management systems Requirements ;
- NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code;
- NF P01-010 6 -Environmental quality of construction products - Environmental and
health declaration of building products ;
- CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety standars for architectural glazing materials
- ANSI Z97.1 Standard - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test.
17.1.3 SUBMITTALS
17.1.3.1 General

a. Intended list of materials
b. Documentation outlining all applicable materials and the percent of the
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;

147 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

a. Bill of Quantities
b. List of materials
c. Specifications listing manufactures and locations
d. Cost estimates
e. Description of the material
f. Description of how the material has been reused
g. g.Report providing distances of manufacturers
h. h.Any documentation from manufacturers outlining thirdparty sourcing
Certification
B. Submit shop drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ) showing set out, assembly
including all associated fixings and bracketry in accordance with local building
code requirements. Upon approval, general contractor shall send to field or job-
site superintendent copy of final approved shop drawing.
C. Submit color samples of exterior covering. Full height glass sample to be

provided to demonstrate finish quality with frit finish applied.
D. Submit fabricated handrail sample including joints, end plates, fixings, specified
finish and code compliance marking.
E. Submit close-out documents, warranties, and manuals.
F. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1. Build mockups as shown on Project drawings.
2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts,
top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height
and are not less than 600 mm in length.
3. Approved mockups will not form part of the completed Work.
17.1.3.2 Glass
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for glazing material and
fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance
instructions.
B. Samples: Submit 300 mm x 300 mm samples of each type of glass to be used

with the specified frit finish. Sample to be representative of the thickness to be
used with 2 finished edges and corner plus preparation for sample fixing.

148 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturer attesting that glass and

glazing materials furnished for the project comply with requirements.
17.1.4.1 General
A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be qualified according to:

1. Unless accepted otherwise by the Contractor, use manufacturers and
installers that employ a Quality Management System complying with the
program described in ISO 9001-2000, or similar system.
2. Environmental Management System complying with the GSAS Railways
design assessment 2015 V2.1;
B. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of
the work of this Section.
C. Use materials which shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability,
and appearance; shall be of best commercial quality for purpose required;
and shall comply with approved drawings.
D. Use manufacturer who has had ten (10) years of experience in the
manufacture of specified product.
17.1.4.2 Glass
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing

Association (FGMA) - Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual except where
more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for
definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or
other referenced standards.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass, tinted float glass,
coated float glass, laminated glass and insulating glass from single source
from single manufacturer for each glass type.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from
single manufacturer for each product and installation method.
D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of

the certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label
shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety
glazing standard with which glass complies.

149 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with
manufacturer's written directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage
to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature
changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes, including high altitude limitations for
insulating glass.
A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are
wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other cause.
B. Install sealant at ambient and substrate temperatures permitted by sealant

manufacturers.
17.1.7 WARRANTY

The Material / component is required to match the look & feel agreed benchmark sample.
The look & feel benchmark samples is available in the QR samples room.
17.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Laminated glass for balustrade is installed vertically and made of two layers of 8mm clear fully
tempered (HST) glass laminated with 3.04mm PVB interlayers.
17.2.1.1 Glass
Canopy laminated glass, is 15.10.4 fully tempered (HST) glassmade of:
A. One layer of fully tempered (HST) 15 mm thick, clear glass (same colour of glazed
curtain wall), bevelled on edges.
B. Four polyvinyl butyral interlayer (PVB) between glass sheets ( 4 interlayers).
C. One layer of fully tempered (HST) 10 mm thick, clear glass (same colour of glazed

150 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17.2.1.2 Adhesives
A. Acceptable manufacturers and products whose formulation determined by glazing
system manufacturer.
B. UV and Light curing acrylate adhesive, medium viscosity , one-component, solvent

free for interior glass/glass, glass/metal and glass/plastic bondings.
C. To be used in a temperature range of -40C to +120C for metal fittings adhesion to

glass.
17.2.1.3 Anchors and fittings

A. Provide glazing accessories, anchors, and fasteners of type recommended by glass
fin structure manufacturer and as required for complete, functional, weathertight
installation, complying referenced standards and comply specification as defined on
the drawings.
B. Metal profiles and plates: metal profiles and plates for Structural Glass Fin Installation
shall comply specification as defined on the drawings and engineer calculation.
C. Anchorage devices: Clips, anchors, fasteners, and shims required for secure
installation of glass fin structure. Type, size, and spacing as recommended by glass
fin structure manufacturer and/or as defined on the drawings and Engineer
calculation.
17.2.1.4 TOLERANCE
A. Manufacturing Tolerances: data to be provided
B. Erection Tolerances:
Otherwise specified in shop-drawings or by manufacturer, installed system shall be
less than the limits specified herein.
Limit variations from plumb, level, or dimensional angle to the following:
1. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) deviation in 1 story height, in 3 m (10 foot)
vertical, angular run, or in 6 m (20 foot) horizontal run.
2. Not more than 6 mm (1/4 inch) deviation in 12 m (40 foot) run, in any
direction.
3. At battered wall areas, plumb is defined to match indicated slope.
Limit variations from location (theoretical calculated position in plan or elevation
based on established floor lines and column lines), including variations from plumb
and level, to the following:
1. Not more than 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) total deviation for member at any location.
2. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) change in deviation for member for 3 m (10
foot) run.

151 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17.2.2 PART 3 - EXECUTION
17.2.3 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with installation
requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and identify
conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion or other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Prior to erection:
1. Dimensional verification measurements prior to fabricating glass fin structure
components
2. Verify location of structural supports and roof anchoring and if their position is
within tolerances and proper alignment.
C. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Coordination: Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with casting of concrete (
floor slabs), structural steel frame (roof), shelters cladding, ventilation plant etc.
E. Structural steel frame:
Ensure that metal profiles and plates, anchor bolts etc and other structure
components to be fixed to roof structures are provided, accurately placed, and
properly sized. Ensure that provision is made for attachments and transfer of
calculated loads.
17.2.4 INSTALLATION
A. Site assemble and erect glass in accordance with approved shop drawings,
manufacturer's installation instructions and GANA Glazing Manual.
B. Particularly:
1. Do not install glass with edge damaged or other imperfections.
2. Allow for settling, expanding, and contracting to occur without breaking glass.
3. Do not field cut or alter structural framing without written approval from
manufacturer and Architect.
C. Install structural glass in metal profiles and fittings as in manufacturers instructions
and in approved shop drawings.
D. Secure glass panels to fittings as in approved shop drawings.
E. Coordinate installation work with erection tolerances, Glazed Curtain Wall installation
works and sealing. Also coordinate installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant
involved.
F. Coordinate installation work with other related works.
17.2.4.1 Field Quality Control

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Field engineer from glass manufacturer shall visually
inspect the system at the following stages to ensure compliance with manufacturer's
recommendation for installation.

152 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Prior to erection, verify structural support system is within tolerances and

proper alignment.
2. During installation: Provide periodic inspection during installation at critical
stages of each curtain wall system.
3. Upon completion of installation: Inspect entire system for areas of non-
conformance to either manufacturer's recommendations or mock-up test report
recommendation.
4. Issue written report within 48 hours of each Site inspection to Contractor and
Architect.
17.2.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform cleaning procedures, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean metal and glass surfaces complying with manufacturer's recommendations
prior to Substantial Completion, exercising care to avoid damage to protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and
other substances. Touch up factory finish if necessary and authorized by engineer
C. Prevent damage to glass surfaces and staining of adjacent materials.
D. Provide final protection and maintain protection and other precautions required to
ensure that system will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal
weathering) at time of acceptance and Substantial Completion. Use protective
methods and materials approved by Engineer, including temporary covering.
E. At the end of the installation, the Subcontractor shall provide the following
administrative and procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
Manuals, including preparing and submitting Instruction Manuals covering the care,
preservation, and maintenance of the mechanical and architectural products and
related finishes.
END OF SECTION

153 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18 SECTION 05 75 10 - SATIN FINISH STAINLESS STEEL
Work in this Section includes:
A. Satin finish stainless steel
Location
Satin finish stainless steel as per architectural drawings
GRADE LEVEL
Secondary Shelter - Public area
Elevator frames / elevators


Defence Department.

version:
B. Section 17 Part 4 Architectural metal work

154 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local building practice. Proven in use, they will not required new research, designs or
cleaning equipment and agents. Repair and replacement with regards to the
availability of material in the region shall be considered in the selection of materials.
4.13.6.1 Finish materials on walls and columns within reach of public shall be highly resistant to
wear and vandalism. The internal wall finishes shall be of a panel system that is
supported either from the top of the bottom. The fixings shall be resistant to vibration
and insensitive to wind or train generated pressure fluctuation, i.e. no rattling,
squeaking, etc.
shall be demountable for purposes of maintenance, cleaning and replacement without
necessitating the removal of adjacent panels.
4.13.6.3 Wall finishes at exposed levels shall be capable of withstanding a 1.5 kN applied point
load according to the technical specifications.
4

locally sourced.
4

155 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.



Labelling).


components.

project site.
1) Products Data sheets confirm that each product does not contain any added urea-
formaldehyde.

156 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
2. 01 00 00 General requirements
3. 05 12 05 Structural steel works



- AAMA 2603 - Volountary specification, performance requirements and Test

Procedures for pigmented Organic Coatings on aluminium extrusions and Panels;
- AAMA 2605 Volountary specification, performance requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on aluminium extrusions and
Panels;
- ASTM A307 -Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
Rod 60000 PSI Tensile Strength
- BS OHSAS 18001:2007 - Health & safety standard
- COSHH - Control of Substances Hazardous to Health;
- EN 1253 - Gullies for buildings. Test methods
- EN 10204 - Control documents for metal products
- EN ISO 3651-2 - Determination of resistance to intergranular corrosion of stainless
steels -- Part 2: Ferritic,austenitic and ferritic-austenitic (duplex) stainless steels --
Corrosion test in media containing sulfuric acid
- ISO 9001:2008 - Quality management systems -- Requirements
- ISO 14001:2004 - Environmental management systems - Requirements with
guidance for use
- UNI EN 10088-1 - Stainless steels - Part 1: List of stainless steels
- UNI EN 10088-2 - Stainless steels - Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for plates,
sheets and corrosion-resistant steel strip for general purposes
- UNI EN ISO 10545-3 - Ceramic tiles - Determination of water absorption, apparent
porosity, apparent relative density and bulk density
- NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code;

157 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18.1.3 SUBMITTALS

recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
g. Report providing distances of manufacturers
h. Any documentation from manufacturers outlining thirdparty sourcing
Certification
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials.
C. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ): Show fabrication and installation
details for all associated bracketry and fixings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture,
or design, including mechanical finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on 300 mm square Samples of metal of same thickness and material
indicated for the Work. Sample include 2 prepared edges, a corner and
preparation for fixing.
F. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.

158 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
H. Coordination Drawings ( Also with model BIM ): For decorative formed metal
elements that house items specified in other Sections ( Section 09 60 00
Flooring, Section 09 70 00 Wall finishes). Show dimensions of housed items,
including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary
clearances.
I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, powder-coating

applicator and professional engineer.
J. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.
K. Welding certificates.
L. Maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: 5 years experience fabricating and installing

decorative metalwork of the required quality.
B. Templates: Supply installation templates, reinforcing and required anchorage

devices.
C. Source Limitations: All Glazed Guarding components and fittings are to be

obtained from the same manufacturer.
D. Code Required Marking of Safety Glazing: All glazing required by SBC 2007
to be safety glazing, such as all glazing in guardings, is to be permanently
labelled to the requirements of SBC 2007.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals

and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication
and installation.
1. Build mockups for each type of decorative formed metal indicated on

drawings of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Contractor and consultant designer.
2. Approved mockups will be separate part of the completed Work.
Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped
together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they
stain or bond to finished surfaces.
Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.

159 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction
contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
18.1.7 WARRANTY
18.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Stainless Steel - Satin finish - 316 grade brushed - for Elevator and elevators frames.
18.2.1.1 General
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to

greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal

items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies
with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints.

Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.
Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 12-mm- wide
hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm
and support with concealed stiffeners.
D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing

materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.
1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces
of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.
E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor

fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal
items as needed to attach and support other construction.

160 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves,

fasteners, and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.
G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams

continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed
surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.
1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause
discoloration of metal being joined.
18.2.1.2 Metal Work frames

Design & provide, per the Architectural drawings and for installation in the works, to suit the
project conditions, for proper connection to building structure and in largest practical sizes for
delivery to site.
A. Assembly: Join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting
bolts and nuts using slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings, flanges,
escutcheons, and wall brackets.
B. Joints: Tightly fitted and secured, machined smooth with hairline seams.
C. Field Connections: Provide sleeves to accommodate site assembly and

installation.
D. Welded and Brazed Joints: Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and
hairline; use methods that avoid discoloration and damage of finish; grind
smooth, polish, and restore to required finish.
1. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
2. Welded Joints:
E. Finish: Superior Performance PVF3 Organic Coatings to AAMA 2605.
18.2.2 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
18.2.2.1 Stainless Steel 316 Grade Brushed
Material Stainless steel 316 L
Finish Satin finish
NFPA 130, 255 Non-combustible
Flammability Non - Flammable

Range: 583 Mpa
Tensile strengh
Sample: 583 Mpa
Range: 170 Mpa
Yield Strength
Sample: 259 Mpa
Range: 40,00%
Elongation
Sample: 53,00%

161 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Range: 95,0 HRB

Hardness
Sample: 75,5 HRB
Water Absorption
No defect
KS D 830 : 2009 Water Resistance
Stain Resistence Good
Dry film Hardness (Mitsubishi Pencil)
Mitsubishi H, No scratch
ASTM D3363
Humidity resistance Test
240hrs, No blister
ASTM D 1735
Adhesion Test
No Peeling
ASTM D3359
Impact Resistance Test
No crack
ASTM D 2794
Salt Spray
240hr<2mm
ASTM B117
SAMPLE
A. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; joints

and seams ground smooth.
B. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and other materials as required to

attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless
otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush
countersunk fasteners.
1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete for
bolting anchors.
2. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry
for bolting anchors.
3. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates for bolting anchors.
4. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.
C. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307.
D. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

162 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18.2.2.3 TOLERANCE
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 6 mm per floor level, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 0.5 mm.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 0.5 mm.
18.3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of decorative formed metal.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
18.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in
alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting
required to install decorative formed metal.
B. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed
by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.Site cutting not
allowed for these elements.
C. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers

fitted to screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a
weathertight connection.
D. Provide lead washers fitted to hazard list and associated mitigation.
E. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide
reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
F. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and flashings, as the Work
progresses.
G. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work
progresses, to make interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or
lightproof as applicable to type of fabrication indicated.
H. Use the suitable abrasive belt to provide the required Satin finish as per
approved sample look and feel

163 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during

construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean

water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B. The Subcontractor shall provide at the end of installation the following

administrative and procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance
(O&M) Manuals, including the following: Preparing and submitting Instruction
Manuals covering the care, preservation, and maintenance of the
architectural products and finishes.
END OF SECTION

164 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19 SECTION 07 62 10 - STAINLESS STEEL FLASHING -

ELEVATOR
This Section includes protective stainless steel flashing Elevator - and accessories to be
installed in secondary shelters as elevator cladding and where indicated.
Location:
Shelters: secondary shelters elevator cladding;


Defence Department.

version:
B. Section 17 Metal works
C. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall

165 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19.1.2.4 Employer Requirement ( Er )
local building practice. Proven in use, they will not require new research, designs or
4.13.1.5 Aesthetics: Emphasis shall be laid on clear, simple use of materials and avoidance of
overstatement in design. Also to be avoided are short-lived or ephemeral design
fashions or fads, pastiche and applied ornamentation. Stations are to provide a
comfortable and controlled environment and are to be bright, colorful and welcoming.
Attempts shall be made where possible to introduce natural lighting to enhance
internal spaces.
4.13.1.6 Maintainability: Materials shall be easily cleaned, in a single operation with standard
cleaning equipment and agents. repair and replacement with regards to the availability
of material in the region shall be considered in the selection of materials
4.13.9.1 For facade areas with extensive fenestration, a proprietary unitized system shall be
installed.
4.13.9.2 Glazing shall be composed of double glazed units. The glass shall have a low-
emissivity coating delivering a minimal G-Value (SHGC value) of between 0.20 to 0.30,
2
U-value 1.1 W/m K, acoustic isolation ca. 40 dB.
4.13.9.3 The glazing shall withstand the design wind loads created at wind speeds of 160 km/h
a wind of 180 km/h for 3 seconds.
4.13.9.4 For glazing where there i risk of collision, manifestartions are to be provided on the
glass elements in suitable intervals so as to minimize this risk.
5

( < 200 kilometres).
locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
5
Each material will be submit with complete assessment sheet Template. Refer section 01 61 05.

166 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


e) Use materials with recycled content at least 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total value
f) Materials shall be labeled as per International Standard ISO 140211999, Environmental
Labelling).


components.

project site.

167 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



- ISO 9001-2000 Quality management systems Requirements ;
- ISO 14000-2004 Environmental management systems - Requirements with guidance
for use;
19.1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. For Initial Review, submit the Regional Materials Calculator and the following
supporting documents:
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
h. Any documentation from manufacturers outlining third party sourcing
Certification
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

168 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,including:

1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
3. Certified test reports clearly indicating compliance with
performance requirements specified herein and in Engineer
calculation report.
4. Sealant manufacturer's data on surface preparation and
application for each type of sealants proposed.
C. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ): Details showing each condition separately
and cross-referenced with applicable details on the Drawings, including the following:
1. wall and openings elevations, sections, dimensions.
3. Metal flashing locations and relationship to adjacent materials, conditions at
adjacent and dissimilar construction, corners, terminations, parapets, soffits,
sills, etc.
4. Anchorage and connection details, including dimensioning for sizing and
setting embedded items, expansion joints both vertically and horizontally.
Locations and details of connection hardware attached to structure
5. Jamb, head, sill, and corner conditions and specific anchorage details for
each situation.
6. Installation procedures or erection sequence for special conditions.
D. Samples: Representative of finished product specified, two complete sets of color

chips showing manufacturer's full range of available finishes and patterns and
particularly:
1. Finish selection: stainless steel metal flashing items, fittings etc.
2. Sealants colors
3. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples,
minimum size 300 mm (12 inches) square, representing actual product,
finish and patterns.
E. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and
owners, and any other information required by Contractor.
G. Test submittals:
a. Source quality control test reports.
b. stainless steel falshing and Fitting materials test report
c. Sealant adhesion field tests.
d. Field quality control test report
Flashing and sheet metal materials
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and
is experienced in manufacturing flashing and sheet metal materials and products

169 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1. Assumes responsibility for engineering flashing and sheet metal materials to
comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation
of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
a. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

legally registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of flashing and sheet metal materials and products that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
2. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the
Work.
B. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be qualified according to:

1. Quality Management System complying with the program described in ISO
9001-2000, or similar system;
2. Environmental Management System complying with the program described in
ISO 14000-2004, or similar system;
C. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of flashing and sheet

metal materials. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricators
certification is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of contracted work.
Production will not be allowed to re-start until the necessary corrections are made and
certification has been re-established. In the event certification(s) cannot be re-
established in a timely manner, causing project delays, the fabricator, at no additional
cost, will contract out the remainder of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified
plant.
D. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved,
authorized, or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product. Include
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers,
and other information specified
E. Mock-ups: Before installing flashing and sheet metal materials, build mock-ups for
each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
Submittals and to demonstrate finished joints, aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings as part of building.

2. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer. Include sealant-filled joints complying with requirements
in related Division
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting installation.

170 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Maintain mockups during installation in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged or
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements of Project Management and Coordination
A. Deliver materials in original packages with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's

labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components,
and application.
Handle and transport packaged materials according to manufacturers instructions and
protect materials from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
B. Store materials in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation and
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects. Protect materials from contact with soil, staining,
and physical damage.
A. Environmental Limitations: For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's

written recommendations for conditions affecting materials installation and
performance. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer's recommended limits.
B. Limit areas to traffic during installation and for appropriate time period after
installation as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Field Measurements: Check surfaces by field measurement before fabrication to

ensure proper fitting of works in this section; indicate measurements on shop
drawings.
19.1.7 WARRANTY

19.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Protective stainless steel flashing formed by metal sheet.

171 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19.2.1.1 Flashing and sheet metal materials

Stainless Steel: ASTM A240, Type 304L.
19.2.1.2 Sheet metal thickness

Except as otherwise shown or specified use thickness or weight of sheet metal as
follows:
1. Concealed Locations (Built into Construction): 0.25 mm thick.
2. Exposed Locations: 0.4 mm thick.
19.2.1.3 Nails and Screws

Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as recommended
by sheet manufacturer, Stronghold type, with large flat heads and sharp points. Use
length sufficient to penetrate framing a minimum of 22 mm. Use lead or neoprene
washers where indicated. Use sheetmetal screws or self-tapping screws to fasten
sheetmetal to other metal. Match finish of exposed heads with finish of material being
fastened.
19.2.1.4 Lap joint sealer

Polyisobutylene non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.
19.2.1.5 Metal Accessories

Sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required
for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-
corrosive, size and gage as required for performance.
19.3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
installation requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing
surfaces, and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion
or other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Apply sheet metal and other flashing material to surfaces which are smooth,
sound, clean, dry and free from defects that might affect the application.
19.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated, specified, or required in accordance
with the SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual. Space rivets at 75 mm (3 inch) on centers in
two rows in a staggered position. Use neoprene washers under fastener heads when
fastener head is exposed.
B. Coordinate with roofing work for the installation of metal base flashings and other
metal items having roof flanges for anchorage and watertight installation.
C. Where required to prevent galvanic action between dissimilar metal isolate the
contact areas of dissimilar metal with sheet lead, waterproof building paper, or a coat
of bituminous paint.

172 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Terminate exterior edge beyond face of wall approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) with drip
edge where not part of counter flashing.
END OF SECTION

173 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20. SECTION 08 11 05 - METAL SCREEN
The Work under this section consist of furnishing, fabrication and erection of a metal screen
made of anodised aluminium perforated panels mounted on anodised aluminium sub-frame
modules as shown on drawings and including the following:
A. Anodised aluminium perforated panels
B. Anodised aluminium sub-frame modules, brackets, sandtrap louvers, fixation etc
Location:
At grade level / Canopy


Defence Department.
20.1.2.3 Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or what's equivalent in latest

version:

174 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. BS 1615 Method for specifying adonic oxidation coatings for general


C. Section 26 Painting and decorating
1. BS 245 Mineral solvent (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents)

for paints and other purposes
2. BS 4652 Metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
D. Section 17 Metalwork- Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding System
E. Section 17 Metalwork -Part 6 Workmanship

materials.
shall be demountable for purposes of maintenance, cleaning and replacement
without necessitating the removal of adjacent panels.
6

175 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.

C. 05 12 05 Structural steel framing



order to give evidence of the compliance with the Employer Requirements
- BS 8000 - Workmanship on construction sites. Introduction and general principles
- DIN 4102 - Fire behavior of building materials and building components
- DIN 50017 - Atmospheres and their technical application; Condensation water test
atmospheres
- DIN EN 13501 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements
- DIN EN 486 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extrusion ingots - Specifications;
- DIN EN 573 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Chemical composition and form of
wrought products
- ISO 11341 - Paints and varnishes -- Artificial weathering and exposure to artificial
radiation -- Exposure to filtered xenon-arc radiation

176 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ISO 14001.2004 - Environmental management systems -- Requirements with

guidance for use
- ISO 2143 - Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys -- Estimation of loss of absorptive
power of anodic oxidation coatings after sealing -- Dye-spot test with prior acid
treatment
- ISO 3210 - Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys -- Assessment of quality of sealed
anodic oxidation coatings by measurement of the loss of mass after immersion in
phosphoric acid/chromic acid solution
- ISO 6719 - Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys -- Measurement of reflectance
characteristics of aluminium surfaces using integrating-sphere instruments
- ISO 6988 - Metallic and other non organic coatings -- Sulfur dioxide test with general
ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)
- DIN EN ISO 11507 - Paints and varnishes -- Exposure of coatings to artificial
weathering -- Exposure to fluorescent UV lamps and water
- DIN EN ISO 9227 - Corrosion tests in artificial atmospheres -- Salt spray tests
- condensation of moisture
- ISO 9227 - Corrosion tests in artificial atmospheres -- Salt spray tests
- ISO 9001-2000 - Quality management systems -- Requirements
- ISO 14001.2004 - Environmental management systems -- Requirements with
guidance for use
20.1.3 SUBMITTALS
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates

177 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

a. Report providing distances of manufacturers
a. Any documentation from manufacturers outlining third-party sourcing
Certification
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information, specifications and

installation instructions for all anodised aluminium metal screen components -
Anodised Aluminium panels, sub-frame, accessories and installations materials -
include related specification section.
C. Design Analysis and Calculations: Provide design analysis and calculations for
supporting anodised sub-frame modules, including brackets, fixations and
connections to other works and other member intersections or openings on screen
wall.
D. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ): Include plans, elevations, sections, all
framing, fixings, bracketry and support, connections to other Work. Also include
details and schedules for fabrication, assembly and erection of supporting sub-frame
members. Provide setting drawings, procedures and erection plan, diagrams, details
of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data.
1. Aluminium panels and sub-frame lay-out, arrangements and locations;
2. Widths, details, and locations of joints (expansion, contraction, control,

and isolation) in aluminium panels substrates and/or supports.
3. For installed products indicate to comply with design loads, include

structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
4. Include large-scale details of decorative surfaces and inscriptions.
E. Samples: Representative set of samples of manufacturer's bespoke products for

panels perforation pattern, colour and textures approval. Submit paint finish on
anodised aluminium panels and sub-frame, including samples of accessories for
colour selection.
If requested Subcontractor shall provide an assembled samples mounted on a rigid

panel or frame. Make samples at least 900 mm square including use of accessories.
Use of materials is limited on the Contractor instruction.
Set of samples and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers
and owners, and any other information required by Contractor.

178 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
G. Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame manufacturer's complete installation

instructions.
H. Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame manufacturer's complete cleaning and

maintenance instructions.
is experienced in manufacturing Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame profiles
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Assumes responsibility for Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame

profiles to comply with performance requirements.
2. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without

delaying the Work.
B. Erector's Qualifications: Anodised Aluminium sub-frame and panels, for final metal
screen, shall be erected by a firm that has not less than 5 years successful
experience in the erection of work similar to that required for this project and that
has been licensed by the manufacturer of the Anodised Aluminium screen. Erector
(Firm) shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
C. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be qualified according to:

2. Environmental Management System complying with the program

described in ISO 14000-2004, or similar system;
D. Erector: Erector (Firm) shall be qualified according to:

E. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production Anodised Aluminium

panels and sub-frame profiles. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the
fabricators certification is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of
contracted work. Production will not be allowed to re-start until the necessary
corrections are made and certification has been re-established. In the event
certification(s) cannot be re-established in a timely manner, causing project delays,
the fabricator, at no additional cost, will contract out the remainder of the units to be
manufactured at a PCI certified plant.

179 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. Mock-ups: Before installing Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame profiles and
accessories, build mock-ups for each form of construction and finish required to
verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate finished joints,
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated
for the completed Work:
1. Build mock-up of typical wall area as shown on Drawings separately from
building.
2. In addition to Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame profiles, mock-

ups include installation materials
3. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if

undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mock-ups before starting installation.
5. Maintain mock-ups during installation in an undisturbed condition as a

6. Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed.
G. Inspection and Testing: Testing and inspection of anodised aluminium sub-frame

connections to other existing works, panel cladding, brackets etc shall be performed
in accordance with applicable codes and standards and as directed by the Engineer.
A. Handle and transport Anodised Aluminium panels and sub-frame profiles using
proper spacers, package system and position to avoid damage.
1. Place non-staining resilient spacers between panels.
2. Support panels on non-staining material during shipment.
3. Protect panels from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
B. Store Anodised Aluminium materials to protect them from contact with soil, staining,
and physical damage and with labels clearly visible.
1. Store panels with non-staining resilient supports in same positions as when
transported.
2. Store panels on firm, level, and smooth surfaces.
3. Place stored panels so identification marks are clearly visible.

180 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations

for conditions affecting anodised sub-frame and panels installation.
2. Limit areas to traffic during anodised sub-frame and panels installation and for
appropriate time period after application as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
20.1.7 WARRANTY
20.2.1 DESCRIPTION
The metal screen for canopy, as per drawing, is made of perforated anodised aluminium
panels mounted on anodised aluminium sub-frame. The sub-frame shall be installed as per
drawing.
As per drawing, the painted anodised aluminium panels are differently perforated as the void
percentage increases from bottom to top of the screen.
Opening for maintenance inspections shall be realized on screen as detailed and specified in
drawings.
Both sub-frame and panels shall be painted, preferably by manufacturer as specified in
drawings and on colour sample selection.
20.2.1.1 Anodised Aluminium profiles

The Anodised Aluminium profiles concern Metal Screen sub-frame, brackets, fixations and
accessories as specified and detailed in shop-drawings.
Anodising is an electrolytiv-passivation process that increase the thickness of the

natural oxide layer on the surface of metal parts, creating a protective films on aluminium
articles through the use of a direct current electrical supply as the part to be treated forms the
anode electrode of an electrical circuit.
Anodizing increases resistance to corrosion and wear, and provides better adhesion for paint
primers and glues than does bare metal.
The final Anodised Aluminium profiles and its colour and finish, approved by Contractor and
Design Consultant on sample selection, shall be installed according to shop drawings, using
manufacturers recommended materials and instruments complying mentioned requirements
and authorized by Contractor and Design Consultant.

181 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The definitive colour and final texture must be authorized by Contractor and Design
Consultant sample selection.
20.2.1.2 The Anodised Aluminium Panels

The Anodised Aluminium panels form the Metal Screen on canopy are installed on the sub-
frame previously described that are placed and fixed at intervals as specified and detailed in
shop-drawings.
Panels are perforated according to an opening percentage that shall be different from bottom
to top and with a perforation pattern as per architectural drawings.
The metal panel cladding, approved by Contractor and Design Consultant on sample
selection, shall be installed according to shop drawings, using manufacturers recommended
materials and instruments complying mentioned requirements and authorized by Contractor
and Design Consultant.
Panel Finishes: as per drawing
The definitive colour and final perforation pattern must be authorized by Contractor and
Design Consultant sample selection.
20.2.1.3 Openings
Openings on the Metal Screen shall be realized in order to have access to metal plants and
their maintenance or for emergency exits.
Openings have their proper supporting structure, connected to cladding sub-frame, and
panels realized a continuous pattern.
20.2.1.4 Installation Material

Use installations materials recommended by Manufacturer and compatible with the product
and its use or location according to shop-drawings approved by Contractor and Design
Consultant.
20.2.1.5 Shop Fabrication

A. General:
1. Fabricate and assemble sub-frame and panels in shop to greatest extent possible.
2. Fabricate items of anodised aluminium sub-frame and panels as indicated on final shop
drawings.
3. Fabricate components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit
easy assembly and disassembly.
4. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be
disassembled, repackaged and reassembled with a minimum amount of labour.
Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with
previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams and instruction manuals.
B. Supporting Framing: Shop fabricate supporting frame components to the size and section
indicated on approved shop drawings complete with brackets and other accessories required
for erection. Provide required holes for fixings or connections either shop drilled or punched
to template dimensions.

182 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Connections: Provide shop connections as required
Technical data sheets shall be provided.
20.3.1 GENERAL
A. Prior to start the Anodised Aluminium sub-frame installation, the subcontractor shall
examine the surfaces and locations where the Anodised Aluminium sub-frame profiles
shall be installed and advise the Main Contractor and Design Consultant of any existing
conditions or surface contamination which will require correction before the work
commences.
Particularly, before starting:
1. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of
Anodised Aluminium sub-frame profiles and panels screen works.
2. Examine supporting substrates to ensure that surfaces are properly cured and
dry, free from dirt and other deleterious matter before sub-structural frame
installation or any installation according to the type of Anodised Aluminium
sub-frame profile work and within flatness/uprightness tolerances of substrates
that should comply with QCS or BS according to the type of work to be
installed. If not, adjust in consultation with Main Contractor and Design
Consultant
3. Verify that plant equipment presence does not interfere or affect performance
with installations work.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in substrates / supporting frames etc doesnt
interfere with Anodised Aluminium profiles and panels' installations; if not,
adjust in consultation with Contractor and Design Consultant
B. Proceed with installations work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
20.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Only use manufacturers recommended installation materials and comply BS

8000.Read and follow installation manufacturer's instructions and shop drawing
approved by Contractor and Design Consultant.
B. Use installing materials as specified in shop-drawing and authorized by Design

Consultant and Main Contractor.

183 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Install Anodised Aluminium sub-frame profile works having surfaces free from
distortion and other defects in appearance, according to manufacturers instructions
and following shop-drawings lay-out.
D. Install anodised aluminium panels works having surfaces free from distortion,
scratches and other defects in appearance, according to manufacturers instructions
and following shop-drawings lay-out.
E. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern
or joint alignments. After installation clean surfaces as per manufacturers
instructions.
F. A certain quantity of Anodised Aluminium profiles and panels screen, suitable for any
replacement, are to be handed to the Contractor.
A. On installation completion, the Anodised Aluminium sub-frame profiles, perforated

screen panels, brackets and all other accessories shall be cleaned according to
manufacturers instructions, not using abrasive sponges or cleaners nor using
corrosive, acetic or acidic detergents, alkaline or solvent-based cleaning agents.
Clean using a soft cloth with a small amount of warm water and mild detergent.
B. Upon completion of the cleaning, the cleaned surfaces provide final protection with
clean dustsheets, hardboard or similar, to prevent damage from dust, scratch or
other.
C. When Anodised Aluminium panels have been completely installed, the owner and/or
his representative shall inspect all finished work to validate that the work has been
completed in compliance with these specifications.
Any defect in meeting installation specifications shall be corrected by the installing

contractor at no additional cost to the owner.
D. The Subcontractor shall provide at the end of installation the following administrative
and procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals,
including the following: Preparing and submitting Instruction Manuals covering the
care, preservation, and maintenance of the architectural products and finishes
END OF SECTION

184 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21 SECTION 08 44 10 - Exterior Glass - Elevator - type 1
This Section includes Exterior Glass Elevator Type 1 and accessories to be installed in
secondary shelters as elevator cladding and where indicated.
Location:
Shelters: secondary shelters elevator faade;


Defence Department.

version:
D. Section 1 General
E. Section 17 Metal works
F. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 3 Workmanship
G. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall
1. BS 4315 Methods of test for resistance to air and water penetration
2. BS 5368 Method for testing windows
3. BS 6262 Code of practise for glazing for buildings

185 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. BS 6375 Performance
5. BS 6469 Power organic coatings for application and and stoving to

aluminium alloy extrusion, sheet and pre-formed sections for
external architectural purposes and for the finish on
aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections
coated with powder organic coatings.
6. BS 6497 Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to hot-

dipped galvanized hot-rolled sections and steel sheet for
windows and associated with external architectural purposes
and for the finish on galvanized steel sections and sheet
7. BS EN 1991-1-4 Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General actions.

Wind actions.
internal spaces.
installed.
2

186 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.


g) Use materials with recycled content at least 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total value
h) Materials shall be labeled as per International Standard ISO 140211999, Environmental
Labelling).


components.

7

187 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
project site.
C. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
D. 01 00 00 General requirements



- CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety standard for architectural glazing materials
- ANSI Z97.1-1984 1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance
Specifications and Methods of Test
- ASTM C 719 Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric
Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement
- ASTM C 1184 Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants
- ASTM C 1369 Standard Specification for Secondary Edge Sealants for Structurally
Glazed Insulating Glass Units
- EOTA ETAG 002 Structural Sealant Glazing Systems
- UNI EN 1279-1 Glass in building. Insulating glass units. Generalities, dimensional
tolerances and rules for the system description

188 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- UNI EN 1279-2 Glass in building. Insulating glass units. Long term test method and
requirements for moisture penetration
requirements for gas leakage rate and for gas concentration tolerances.
- UNI EN 1279-4 Glass in building.Test method for the physical properties of the
sealing edge.
- UNI EN 1279-6 Glass in building. Factory production control and periodic test.
- EN 15434 Glass in building. Product standard for structural and/or ultra-violet
resistant sealant (for use with structural sealant glazing and/or insulating glass units
with exposed seals)
- EN 13022 Glass in building. Structural sealant glazing. Assembly rules
- EN 11925-2 Reaction to fire tests. Ignitability of products subjected to direct
impingement of flame. Single-flame source test
- DIN 4102-B1 Fire Test to Building material - Classification
- EN 356 Safety glass. Testing and classification against manual attack.
- UNI EN 673:2011 Glass In Building - Determination Of Thermal Transmittance
(U Value) - Calculation Method
- EN 410 Determination of luminous and solar characteristics of glazing.
- ISO 9050 Glass in building - Determination of light transmittance, solar direct
transmittance, total solar energy transmittance, ultraviolet transmittance and related
glazing factors
- EN 13501-2 Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
Classification using data from fire resistance tests, excluding ventilation services
Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests
- UNI EN 1063 Classification and strength tests to the bullets
- EN 12758 Glazing and sound insulation by air. Product descriptions and
determination of properties.
- UNI EN 12600 Pendulum test. Impact test method and classification for flat glass.
UNI EN 13541 safety glass. Testing and classification of resistance against
explosion pressure.
- ISO 868 Plastics and ebonite. Determination of indentation hardness by means of a
durometer (Shore hardness)
- ISO 37 Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic. Determination of tensile stress-strain
properties
- ISO 34 General requirements for the competence of reference material producers
for use;
21.1.3 SUBMITTALS


189 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
b.
Documentation outlining all applicable materials and the percent of the
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
Certification

calculation report.
C. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ): Show fabrication, assembly and
installation details for glazed curtain wall panels, including the following:
1. Structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
2. Glazed curtain wall and openings elevations, sections, dimensions.
3. Relationship to adjacent materials, conditions at adjacent and dissimilar
construction, corners, terminations, parapets, soffits, sills, etc.
5. Glass types, sizes, and edge clearances.
each situation.
H. Samples: Representative of finished product specified, two complete sets of color

chips showing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns and
particularly:

190 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Finish selection: Glass connector hardware.

2. Glass: 305 mm by 305 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) sample of glass.
3. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or
more units in each set of samples showing the limits of such variations.
4. Finish shall represent color range, finish thickness, and sheen to be expected
in the finished Work.
5. Glass fittings
6. Metal finishes
7. Sealants colors
minimum size 150 mm (6 inches) square, representing actual product, color,
and patterns.
I. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
J. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
K. Test submittals:
a. Glass certifications on required glass properties
b. Fitting materials test report
c. Source quality control test reports.
d. Sealant adhesion field tests.
e. Field quality control test report
is experienced in manufacturing Glazed Curtain Wall and products similar to those
1. Assumes responsibility for engineering Glazed Curtain Wall to comply with
performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop
Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer.

installations of Glazed Curtain Wall and products that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
Work.


191 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of Glazed Curtain Wall.

Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricators certification is
revoked, regardless of the status of completion of contracted work. Production will not
be allowed to re-start until the necessary corrections are made and certification has
been re-established. In the event certification(s) cannot be re-established in a timely
manner, causing project delays, the fabricator, at no additional cost, will contract out
the remainder of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified plant.

E. Mock-ups: Before installing Glazed Curtain Wall, build mock-ups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals
and to demonstrate finished joints, aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work:

in related Division
be constructed.

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with
other components, and application.
Handle and transport Glazed Curtain Wall components to avoid excessive stresses or
damage.
1. Lift or support packaged materials only at points indicated by manufacturer or
on Shop Drawings.
2. Place non-staining resilient spacers of even thickness between packaged
materials units.
3. During shipment and transport, support packaged materials units on non-
staining shock-absorbing material otherwise suggested by manufacturers
instructions.

192 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Protect packaged materials from dirt and damage during handling and
transport.
moisture or other detrimental effects. Particularly, protect materials from contact with
soil, staining, and physical damage.
1. Store packaged materials units with non-staining resilient supports in same
positions as when transported.
2. Store packaged materials units on firm, level and smooth surfaces.
3. Place stored packaged materials units so identification marks are clearly
visible.
4. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials and materials used with solvent-
based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.

written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient
temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting Glazed Curtain
Wall performance.Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
B. Close areas to traffic during Glazed Curtain Wall installation and for appropriate time
period after installation as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to

ensure proper fitting of work; indicate measurements on shop drawings.
21.1.7 WARRANTY

21.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Glazed curtain wall for elevator facade consists of a glazed envelope on aluminium mullion
and transom as described in detailed drawings, with dot fritted pattern (custom pattern).

193 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21.2.1.1 Glass
The double pane glazing is a solar control glass that offers a good level of natural lighting (Lt
value 0.48), high thermal insulation (Ug value 1.10 W m K), low values of solar gain (solar
factor g value 0.30).
The double glazed unit is composed by the following layers:

A. Laminated heat-strengthened float glass, 4 mm + 1.52 mm PVB interlayer + 4 mm
thick, minimum, fritting with pattern (custom pattern) as per drawing on #2 surface C-
type metallic coating on side #4
B. 18 mm gap filled with Argon 90% - warm edge spacer bar
C. minimum 6mm thick Heat-strengthened float surface clear glass
21.2.1.2 Adhesives, sealants and gaskets

Acceptable manufacturers and products whose formulation determined by glazing system
manufacturer.
A. Standard sealant: two-part, neutral-curing insulating glass sealant with structural
capabilities, designed for air and noble gas filled IG-units. Ideal as a secondary edge
seal for air and gas-filled insulating glass in structural glazing applications.
According to ETAG 002, meets requirements of EN 1279 (including part 3), EOTA
ETAG 002 and EN 15434 as well as ASTM C 1184 and ASTM C 1369
B. High performance structural silicone adhesive: two-part, high-modulus neutral-curing

structural silicone adhesive, mainly used for structural glazing applications and ideal
for structural glazing, bonding of solar modules and other high demanding industrial
applications.
Meets requirements of EOTA ETAG 002, EN 13022 and ASTM C 1184
SNJF-VEC / VI-VEC recognized
Fire rated (EN 11925-2 / DIN 4102-B1)
Resistant to UV and weathering
Structural silicone adhesive according to ETAG 002
C. Ethylene-Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM ) or extruded polyethylene foam gaskets

available in rods, different diameters and lengths. It also acts as bond breaker
permitting the most efficient joint design.

All fitting material shall comply referenced standards and comply specification as defined on
the drawings.
Metal Profiles and Plates: Metal profiles and plates shall comply specification as defined in
the drawings. Base Metal and Finish: Refer to drawings.
Aluminium mullions and transom: shall comply specification as defined in the drawings and/or
by manufacturer.

194 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All structural bolts to carry an S.A.E. grade or A.S.T.M. specification as defined on the
drawings.
21.2.2.1 EXTERIOR GLASS - ELEVATOR - TYPE 1 properties do not consider frit

pattern
Light Energy
Light Transmission 48 Solar factor 30
Light Reflection 8 Reflection 20
Thermal properties EN 673 1.1
Ug (W/m2K)
W/m2K
Light properties (EN 410)
Light Transmission - v (%) 48
Light Reflection - v (%) 8
Internal light reflection - vi (%) 11
Colour Rendering - RD65 - Ra (%) 92
Energy properties (EN 410 / ISO 9050) EN 410
Solar factor - g (%) 30
Energy Reflection - e (%) 20
Direct Energy Transmission - e(%) 22
Glass 1 - Energy absorption - e (%) 56
Shading coefficient - SC 0.34
UV Transmission - UV (%) 0
Selectivity
Other properties
Resistance to fire - EN 13501-2 NPD
Reaction to fire - EN 13501-1 NPD
Bullet Resistance - EN 1063 NPD
Burglar Resistance - EN 356 NPD
Pendulum body impact resistance - EN 12600 NPD
21.2.2.2 Adhesive and Sealants
Standard sealing

195 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Component Component
Properties
A B
Chemical base 2-C silicone
White / Light Black / Dark
Colour (CQP1 001-1)
grey grey
Colour mixed
Black / grey S6
Cure mechanism Polycondensation
Cure type Neutral
Density (uncured) (CQP 006-4) 1.42 kg/l 1.09 kg/l
Density mixed 1.4 kg/l
A:B by volume 10:1
Mixing ratio
A:B By weight 13:1
Viscosity 900 Pa*s 500 Pa*s
Consistency Paste
Application temperature 5-40C
Snap time 90 minutes
Tack-free time 150 minutes
Shore A-hardness (ISO 868) 60
Tensile strength ( ISO 37) 2.5 MPa
Elongation at break (ISO 37) 150 %
Tear propagation resistance (ISO 34) 3 N/mm
100% modulus ( ISO 37) 2.1 MPa
4 hours 200 C
Thermal resistance short term
1 hour 220 C
Service temperature - 40 - 150 C
Shelf life (storage below 25 C) 15 months 12 months
High performance structural silicone adhesive

Component
Properties Component A
B
Colour White / Light Black / Dark
grey grey
Colour mixed other colours on
request Black / grey S6
Cure type Neutral
Density (uncured) 1.4 kg/l 1.1 kg/l

196 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

A:B by volume 10:1
Mixing ratio
A:B By weight 13:1
Consistency Paste
Shore A-hardness ( ISO 868) 45
Elongation at break ( ISO 37) 300 %
Tear propagation resistance ( ISO 34) 6.0 N/mm
12.5 % modulus ( ISO 37) 0.3 MPa
Movement accommodation capability (ASTM C 719) + 12.5 %
Water vapor permeability (EN 1279-4) 19 g H2O / m224 h2 mm
4 hours 200 C
1 hour 220 C
21.2.3 TOLERANCE
Manufacturing Tolerances: data to be provided
Erection Tolerances:
Otherwise specified in shop-drawings, installed system shall be less than the limits specified
herein.
1. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) deviation in 1 story height, in 3 m (10 foot) vertical,
angular run, or in 6 m (20 foot) horizontal run.
2. Not more than 6 mm (1/4 inch) deviation in 12 m (40 foot) run, in any direction.
Limit variations from location (theoretical calculated position in plan or elevation based on
established floor lines and column lines), including variations from plumb and level, to the
following:
2. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) change in deviation for member for 3 m (10 foot) run.

197 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21.3.1 GENERAL
1. Prior to erection:
a. Dimensional verification measurements
b. Verify structural support system is within tolerances and proper alignment.
2. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
B. Coordinate with other related installation works, particularly with Structural Glass Fin,
Shelters cladding, Mechanical & Electrical Plants and drainage systems.
21.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install curtain wall system to comply with manufacturer's instructions and comply with
AISC "Manual of Standard Practice" for installation of steel elements.
B. Plate to plate joints of glass are sealed with silicone sealant or according to shop
drawings. Joint dimensions shall be designed to be compatible with sealant properties
and live load movement of the structure.
C. Fixing materials as specified on shop drawings. Use calibrated tools to lock bolts into
position to prevent back-off. Reset calibrations regularly to ensure accurate
torqueing.
D. Coordinate installation work with erection tolerances and Fin installation works. Also
coordinate installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant involved and drainage
system involved.
E. Coordinate installation work with other related works.
21.3.2.1 Sealants:
A. Install sealants as indicated in shop drawings as required to achieve water and

airtight assembly, complying with requirements and instructions of curtain wall
manufacturer.
.

198 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Respect the application temperature (from 5 to 40 degrees C). At higher

temperatures, the crosslinking agents / catalysts may evaporate too quickly, thus
disturbing the correct silicone vulcanization.
C. Do not proceed with sealing during the hottest hours of the day.
D. Surfaces must clean dry and free from oil, grease and dust.
E. Follow manufacturers instruction to prepare two-components products.
F. Clean and prime joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Install sealant and
related backing material around perimeter of frames or supporting system.
G. Apply sealant filling joint and tool smooth to insure full contact with adjacent surfaces.
Strike off excess material.

A. Sealant Adhesion Field Test: Comply with the following:
1. Weathering Sealant Adhesion: After sealant is fully cured, perform sealant adhesion
test according to sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Structural Glazing Sealant Adhesion: After sealant is fully cured, perform not less
than 2 adhesion tests for structural silicone sealant complying with AAMA Structural
Sealant Glazing Systems Design Guide
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Field engineer from curtain wall manufacturer shall
visually inspect the system at the following stages to ensure compliance with
manufacturer's recommendation for installation.
1. Prior to erection, verify structural support system is within tolerances and proper
alignment.
2. During installation: Provide periodic inspection during installation at critical stages of
each curtain wall system.
3. Upon completion of installation: Inspect entire system for areas of non-conformance
to either manufacturer's recommendations or mock-up test report recommendation.
Architect.
A. Perform cleaning procedures, according to Glazed Curtain Wall manufacturer's written

instructions.
Clean metal and glass surfaces complying with manufacturer's recommendations prior to
Substantial Completion, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and
finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.
Touch up factory finish if necessary and authorized by engineer
Prevent damage to Glazed Curtain Wall surfaces and staining of adjacent materials.
B. Provide final protection and maintain protection and other precautions required to ensure
that system will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at

199 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
time of acceptance and Substantial Completion. Use protective methods and materials
approved by Engineer, including temporary covering.
C. At the end of the installation, the Subcontractor shall provide the following administrative
and procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, including
preparing and submitting Instruction Manuals covering the care, preservation, and
maintenance of the mechanical and architectural products and related finishes.
END OF SECTION

200 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22 SECTION 08 44 10 - Exterior Glass - Elevator - type 2
This Section includes Exterior Glass Elevator Type 2 and accessories to be installed in
secondary shelters as elevator cladding and where indicated.
Location:


Defence Department.

version:
H. Section 1 General
I. Section 17 Metal works
J. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 3 Workmanship
K. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall

201 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Wind actions.
internal spaces.
installed.
2

202 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.


Labelling).


components.

8

203 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

project site.




204 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
sealing edge.
with exposed seals)
glazing factors
explosion pressure.
properties
for use;
22.1.3 SUBMITTALS


205 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
b.
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
Certification

calculation report.
each situation.
8. Installation procedures or erection sequence for
special conditions.

206 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Samples: Representative of finished product specified, two complete sets of color

particularly:
5. Glass fittings
6. Metal finishes
7. Sealants colors
and patterns.
E. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
G. Test submittals:
engineer.

Work.


207 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

G. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of Glazed Curtain Wall.

H. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

I. Mock-ups: Before installing Glazed Curtain Wall, build mock-ups for each form of

in related Division
be constructed.
J. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

damage.
on Shop Drawings.
materials units.

208 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

instructions.
transport.
visible.
jurisdiction.


22.1.7 WARRANTY
22.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Glazed curtain wall for elevator facade consists of a glazed envelope on aluminium mullion
and transom as described in detailed drawings, with dot fritted pattern (52%-80% opacity) .

209 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
22.2.1.1 Glass
The double pane glazing is a solar control glass that offers a good level of natural lighting (Lt
value 0.48), high thermal insulation (Ug value 1.10 W m K), low values of solar gain (solar
factor g value 0.30).
The double glazed unit is composed by the following layers:

A. Laminated heat-strengthened float glass, 4 mm + 1.52 mm PVB interlayer + 4 mm
thick, minimum, fritting with dot fritted pattern (52%-80% opacity) as per drawing on
#2 surface C-type metallic coating on side #4
B. 18 mm gap filled with Argon 90% - warm edge spacer bar
C. minimum 6mm thick Heat-strengthened float surface clear glass
22.2.1.2 Adhesives, sealants and gaskets

Acceptable manufacturers and products whose formulation determined by glazing system
manufacturer.
A. Standard sealant: two-part, neutral-curing insulating glass sealant with structural
capabilities, designed for air and noble gas filled IG-units. Ideal as a secondary edge
seal for air and gas-filled insulating glass in structural glazing applications.
According to ETAG 002, meets requirements of EN 1279 (including part 3), EOTA
ETAG 002 and EN 15434 as well as ASTM C 1184 and ASTM C 1369
B. High performance structural silicone adhesive: two-part, high-modulus neutral-curing

structural silicone adhesive, mainly used for structural glazing applications and ideal
for structural glazing, bonding of solar modules and other high demanding industrial
applications.
Meets requirements of EOTA ETAG 002, EN 13022 and ASTM C 1184
SNJF-VEC / VI-VEC recognized
Fire rated (EN 11925-2 / DIN 4102-B1)
Resistant to UV and weathering
Structural silicone adhesive according to ETAG 002
C. Ethylene-Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM ) or extruded polyethylene foam gaskets

available in rods, different diameters and lengths. It also acts as bond breaker
permitting the most efficient joint design.

All fitting material shall comply referenced standards and comply specification as defined on
the drawings.
Metal Profiles and Plates: Metal profiles and plates shall comply specification as defined in
the drawings. Base Metal and Finish: Refer to drawings.
Aluminium mullions and transom: shall comply specification as defined in the drawings and/or
by manufacturer.

210 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
All structural bolts to carry an S.A.E. grade or A.S.T.M. specification as defined on the
drawings.
22.2.2.1 EXTERIOR GLASS - ELEVATOR - TYPE 2 properties do not consider frit

pattern
Light Energy
Light Transmission 48 Solar factor 30
Light Reflection 8 Reflection 20
Thermal properties EN 673 1.1
Ug (W/m2K)
W/m2K
Light properties (EN 410)
Light Transmission - v (%) 48
Light Reflection - v (%) 8
Internal light reflection - vi (%) 11
Colour Rendering - RD65 - Ra (%) 92
Energy properties (EN 410 / ISO 9050) EN 410
Solar factor - g (%) 30
Energy Reflection - e (%) 20
Direct Energy Transmission - e(%) 22
Shading coefficient - SC 0.34
UV Transmission - UV (%) 0
Selectivity
Other properties
Resistance to fire - EN 13501-2 NPD
Reaction to fire - EN 13501-1 NPD
Bullet Resistance - EN 1063 NPD
Burglar Resistance - EN 356 NPD
Pendulum body impact resistance - EN 12600 NPD
22.2.2.2 Adhesive and Sealants
Standard sealing
Properties Component A Component B
Colour (CQP1 001-1) White / Light Black / Dark

211 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
grey grey
Colour mixed
Black / grey S6
Cure type Neutral
Density (uncured) (CQP 006-4) 1.42 kg/l 1.09 kg/l
A:B by volume 10:1
Mixing ratio
A:B By weight 13:1
Consistency Paste
Shore A-hardness (ISO 868) 60
Elongation at break (ISO 37) 150 %
Tear propagation resistance (ISO 34) 3 N/mm
4 hours 200 C
1 hour 220 C
High performance structural silicone adhesive

Properties Component A Component B
White / Light Black / Dark
Colour
grey grey
Colour mixed other colours on request
Black / grey S6
Cure type Neutral
Density (uncured) 1.4 kg/l 1.1 kg/l
A:B by volume 10:1
Mixing ratio
A:B By weight 13:1
Consistency Paste

212 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Shore A-hardness ( ISO 868) 45
Elongation at break ( ISO 37) 300 %
Tear propagation resistance ( ISO 34) 6.0 N/mm
12.5 % modulus ( ISO 37) 0.3 MPa
Movement accommodation capability (ASTM C 719) + 12.5 %
Water vapor permeability (EN 1279-4) 19 g H2O / m224 h2 mm
4 hours 200 C
1 hour 220 C
22.2.3 TOLERANCE

Otherwise specified in shop-drawings, installed system shall be less than the limits
specified herein.
Limit variations from location (theoretical calculated position in plan or elevation based
on established floor lines and column lines), including variations from plumb and level, to
the following:
2. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) change in deviation for member for 3 m (10 foot)
run.
22.3.1 GENERAL

213 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Dimensional verification measurements
b. Verify structural support system is within tolerances and proper alignment.
corrected.
B. Coordinate with other related installation works, particularly with Structural Glass Fin,
Shelters cladding, Mechanical & Electrical Plants and drainage systems.
22.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install curtain wall system to comply with manufacturer's instructions and comply with
AISC "Manual of Standard Practice" for installation of steel elements.
B. Plate to plate joints of glass are sealed with silicone sealant or according to shop
drawings. Joint dimensions shall be designed to be compatible with sealant properties
and live load movement of the structure.
C. Fixing materials as specified on shop drawings. Use calibrated tools to lock bolts into
position to prevent back-off. Reset calibrations regularly to ensure accurate torqueing.
D. Coordinate installation work with erection tolerances and Fin installation works. Also
coordinate installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant involved and drainage system
involved.
22.3.2.1 Sealants:
A. Install sealants as indicated in shop drawings as required to achieve water and airtight
assembly, complying with requirements and instructions of curtain wall manufacturer.
B. Respect the application temperature (from 5 to 40 degrees C). At higher temperatures,
the crosslinking agents / catalysts may evaporate too quickly, thus disturbing the correct
silicone vulcanization.

A. Sealant Adhesion Field Test: Comply with the following:
1. Weathering Sealant Adhesion: After sealant is fully cured, perform sealant adhesion
test according to sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

214 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Structural Glazing Sealant Adhesion: After sealant is fully cured, perform not less
than 2 adhesion tests for structural silicone sealant complying with AAMA Structural
Sealant Glazing Systems Design Guide
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Field engineer from curtain wall manufacturer shall
visually inspect the system at the following stages to ensure compliance with
manufacturer's recommendation for installation.
alignment.
Architect.
A. Perform cleaning procedures, according to Glazed Curtain Wall manufacturer's written

instructions.
Clean metal and glass surfaces complying with manufacturer's recommendations prior to
Touch up factory finish if necessary and authorized by engineer
Prevent damage to Glazed Curtain Wall surfaces and staining of adjacent materials.
B. Provide final protection and maintain protection and other precautions required to ensure
C. At the end of the installation, the Subcontractor shall provide the following administrative
END OF SECTION

215 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23 SECTION 08 44 15 - SUBSTRUCTURE GLAZING SYSTEM -

ELEVATOR
This Section includes substructure glazing system - Elevator and accessories to be installed
in secondary shelters for elevator faade and where indicated.
Location:


Defence Department.

version:
B. Section 17 Architectural Metal works
C. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 3 Workmanship
D. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall

216 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
internal spaces.
installed.
2
9

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
9

217 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23.1.3 Leadership In Energy And Environmental Design (LEED)
23.1.3.1.1 Landscape & Shelter Materials


Labelling).


components.

project site.

218 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



for use;
23.1.4 SUBMITTALS

recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
Certification

219 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. Certified test reports clearly indicating compliance with performance
requirements specified herein and in Engineer calculation report.
4. Test reports and certifications on other related materials proposed.
installation details for substructure system for glazed curtain wall, including the
following:
2. Glazed curtain wall and openings substructure elevations, sections,
dimensions.
5. Substructure details and dimensions.
6. Fitting materials.
H. Samples: Representative of finished product specified in this section, including

accessoties and fittings materials, two complete sets of color chips showing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
I. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
J. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
K. Test submittals:
a. Substructures materials
is experienced in manufacturing substructure glazing system and products similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1. Assumes responsibility for engineering substructure glazing system to comply
with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop

220 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

engineer.

installations of substructure glazing system and products that are similar
to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
Work.

C. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of substructure glazing

system. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricators certification
is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of contracted work. Production will
not be allowed to re-start until the necessary corrections are made and certification
has been re-established. In the event certification(s) cannot be re-established in a
timely manner, causing project delays, the fabricator, at no additional cost, will
contract out the remainder of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified plant.

E. Mock-ups: Before installing substructure glazing system, build mock-ups for each
form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample

in related Division
be constructed.

221 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Handle and transport substructure system materials to avoid any damage. Protect
packaged materials from dirt and damage during handling and transport.

temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting substructure
system installation works and performances. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
B. Close areas to traffic during substructure system materials installation and for
appropriate time period after installation as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Field Measurements: Check areas and surfaces by field measurement before

fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; indicate measurements on shop drawings.
23.1.8 WARRANTY

23.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Aluminium-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing.

Thermally insulated self-supporting aluminium faade system "without external cover caps
and glass pressure plates, option with gas-tight (EN 1279, Part 3) or airtight (EN 1279, Part 2)
pane edge joint"
As a mullion/transom construction for faades with an internal and external face width of 60
mm

222 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23.2.1.1 Approval:
Planning, calculation and design must be in accordance with the conditions of the general
building authority approval, approval number Z-70.1-46, and/or European Technical Approval
(ETA), approval number ETA-05/0114. Designs that differ from the general building authority
approval / ETA require project-specific approval from the respective supreme building
authority.
23.2.1.2 Load-bearing structure:

1. The load-bearing structure of the faade construction consists of rectangular multi-
chamber hollow profiles.
2. The load-bearing profiles are on the room side.
3. All profile edges are rounded.
4. The transom profiles are notched and overlap the mullions where they intersect, so that
any moisture is reliably drained away.
5. All horizontal joints must be constructed using the joint connectors and joint tolerance
seals belonging to the system. Appropriate system-based aluminium insert profiles and
half profiles, as well as expansion joint seals, must be used for vertical expansion and
assembly joints.
23.2.1.3 Glazing / insert units:

1. The insulating glass is mechanically fixed to the structure of the faade using screw-in
glazing clips which are inserted into the pane edge joint between the double glazing
panes.
2. The maximum distances between supports of the clips are calculated in accordance
with the tables and fabrication information provided by the system manufacturer.
3. Depending on the pane composition and when using reinforced glazing supports in
conjunction with aluminium or steel insert profiles and heavy duty T-cleats, glass loads
can be transferred per pane field (see the fabrication documentation from the system
manufacturer).
4. Storey-height glazing with safety requirements in accordance with TRAV must be

secured individually with additional glazing clips.
5. The remaining 20 mm wide joint between the glass edges is closed with a PE filling
tape and sealed with silicone sealant: DOW CORNING, DC 795/DC 797 - SIKA AG,
Elastosil 600/605.
23.2.1.4 Ventilation:
1. The faades must be designed according to the principle of overall ventilation. For
transom lengths > 1500 mm, there must be additional ventilation in the centre of the
field.
2. Profile face widths:

223 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mullion, transom 60 mm
3. Profile basic depths:

Mullion 110 mm
Transom 90 mm
23.2.1.5 Fixings and Fastenings:

1. The Installation shall incorporate completely concealed fixings and fastenings
throughout.
2. These fixings and fastenings may include, but are not limited to, bolts, anchors,
brackets, packers, screws, rivets, studs, nuts, washers and separators.
3. Where in exceptional cases it is accepted that exposed fixings or fastenings are

unavoidable, the Facade Contractor shall take particular care to design and locate
these to the complete satisfaction of the Design Team.
4. Any exposed fixings or fastenings within reach, shall be incapable of being undone by
hand or with the use of ordinary tools.
5. Any stainless steel fixings or fastenings shall be to BS EN 1SO 3506. grade A2
6. Aluminium brackets, rivets and sheer pins to be to BS EN 755 (relevant parts).
7. Sufficient adjustment to be provided in three dimensions to accommodate building

structure and fabrication/installation tolerances.
8. All brackets supporting the cladding shall transmit all loads to the structure evenly and
without hard point contact.
9. Shims under mounting brackets may be used where appropriate but they must be
mechanical secured to avoid migration due to building movement and other dynamic
effects.
23.2.1.6 Joints:
1. The Installation shall incorporate inconspicuous joints within and between components
which shall accommodate movement of the Installation and the adjacent structure and /
or construction, and which shall avoid distortion or damage of the Installation or
adjacent structure and / or construction.
Where movement joints are provided within the building structure or building elements
adjacent to the Installation, then the Installation shall incorporate joints coincident with
these.
2. All joints shall be plumb, true and square with the following specific tolerances:
Deviations in width shall be gradual and less than 10% of the nominal joint width.
Deviations between the flat faces of adjacent components shall be less than 10% of the
nominal joint width.
3. Joints between panels are to be strictly limited to those shown on the drawings.

224 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
23.2.1.7 Jointing Materials:

1. Gaskets, sealants, glazing beads and glazing components shall be of materials that do
not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass, glazing materials, other building
materials or each other.
2. Gaskets Material:
- Non cellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
3. Continuity:
External gaskets of the flush faced curtain walling systems and inner gaskets of
drained and ventilated or pressure equalized curtain walling systems must be formed in
a complete frame with sealed joints. Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory
moulded corner joints.
23.2.1.8 TOLERANCE
direction.
foot) run.
23.3.1 GENERAL

225 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Dimensional verification measurementsprior to fabricating glass fin
structure components
b. Verify location of structural supports and roof anchoring and if their
position is within tolerances and proper alignment.
corrected.
B. Coordination: Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with casting of concrete

( floor slabs), structural steel frame (roof), shelters cladding, ventilation plant etc.
1. Structural steel frame: Ensure that metal profiles and plates, anchor bolts
etc and other structure components to be fixed to roof structures are
provided, accurately placed, and properly sized. Ensure that provision is
made for attachments and transfer of calculated loads.
23.3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Particularly:

226 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

D. Secure glass panels to fittings as in approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation

work with erection tolerances, Glazed Curtain Wall installation works and sealing.
Also coordinate installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant involved.
alignment.


recommendation.
Architect.

related finishes.
END OF SECTION

227 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24 SECTION 08 44 15 - SUB-STRUCTURE GLAZING SYSTEM

- CANOPY
This Section includes substructure glazing system Canopy and accessories to be installed
in secondary shelters and where indicated.
Location:
Shelters: secondary shelters canopy;


Defence Department.

version:
E. Section 1 General
F. Section 17 Metal works
G. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 3 Workmanship
H. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall

228 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
internal spaces.
installed.
2
10

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
10

229 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Labelling).


components.

project site.
C. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
D. 01 00 00 General requirements

230 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



for use;
24.1.4 SUBMITTALS
D. GSAS Design assessment

j. Intended list of materials
k. Documentation outlining all applicable materials and the percent of the
recycle content.
l. Full representative panel assembly / quality sample;
m. Mock up.
n. QCD certification
o. Material / Component technical data with Health and Safety
requirements;
p. Material / Component / Assembly calculation.
q. Method statement for construction / installation.
r. O&M manual and as built BIM and drawings
i. Bill of Quantities
j. List of materials
k. Specifications listing manufactures and locations
l. Cost estimates
m. Description of the material
n. Description of how the material has been reused
o. Report providing distances of manufacturers
p. Any documentation from manufacturers outlining third party sourcing
Certification

231 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

7. Certified test reports clearly indicating compliance with performance
requirements specified herein and in Engineer calculation report.
8. Test reports and certifications on other related materials proposed.
F. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ): Show fabrication, assembly and
installation details for substructure system for glazed curtain wall, including the
following:
4. Glazed curtain wall and openings substructure elevations, sections,
dimensions.
9. Substructure details and dimensions.
10. Fitting materials.
L. Samples: Representative of finished product specified in this section, including

accessoties and fittings materials, two complete sets of color chips showing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
M. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
N. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
O. Test submittals:
f. Substructures materials
g. Fitting materials test report
h. Source quality control test reports.
i. Sealant adhesion field tests.
j. Field quality control test report
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and
is experienced in manufacturing substructure glazing system and products similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
3. Assumes responsibility for engineering substructure glazing system to comply
with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop

232 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

engineer.
b. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

installations of substructure glazing system and products that are similar
to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
Work.
D. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be qualified according to:

G. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of substructure glazing

system. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricators certification
is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of contracted work. Production will
not be allowed to re-start until the necessary corrections are made and certification
has been re-established. In the event certification(s) cannot be re-established in a
timely manner, causing project delays, the fabricator, at no additional cost, will
contract out the remainder of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified plant.
H. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

I. Mock-ups: Before installing substructure glazing system, build mock-ups for each
form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample

in related Division
be constructed.

233 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
J. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

C. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
Handle and transport substructure system materials to avoid any damage. Protect
packaged materials from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
D. Store materials in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation and
C. Environmental Limitations: For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's

temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting substructure
system installation works and performances. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
D. Close areas to traffic during substructure system materials installation and for
appropriate time period after installation as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Field Measurements: Check areas and surfaces by field measurement before

fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; indicate measurements on shop drawings.
24.1.8 WARRANTY

24.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Aluminium-framed glazed roof, with vision glazing. Self-supporting aluminium faade system
"without external cover caps and glass pressure plates, option with gas-tight (EN 1279, Part
3) or airtight (EN 1279, Part 2) pane edge joint"

234 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
24.2.1.1 Approval:
Planning, calculation and design must be in accordance with the conditions of the general
building authority approval, approval number Z-70.1-46, and/or European Technical Approval
(ETA), approval number ETA-05/0114. Designs that differ from the general building authority
approval / ETA require project-specific approval from the respective supreme building
authority.
24.2.1.2 Load-bearing structure:

1. The load-bearing structure of the faade construction consists of rectangular
multi-chamber hollow profiles.
2. The load-bearing profiles are on the room side.
3. All profile edges are rounded.
4. The transom profiles are notched and overlap the mullions where they
intersect, so that any moisture is reliably drained away.
5. All horizontal joints must be constructed using the joint connectors and joint
tolerance seals belonging to the system. Appropriate system-based
aluminium insert profiles and half profiles, as well as expansion joint seals,
must be used for vertical expansion and assembly joints.
24.2.1.3 Glazing / insert units:

1. The insulating glass is mechanically fixed to the structure of the faade using
screw-in glazing clips which are inserted into the pane edge joint between the
double glazing panes.
2. The maximum distances between supports of the clips are calculated in

accordance with the tables and fabrication information provided by the system
manufacturer.
3. Depending on the pane composition and when using reinforced glazing

supports in conjunction with aluminium or steel insert profiles and heavy duty
T-cleats, glass loads can be transferred per pane field (see the fabrication
documentation from the system manufacturer).
4. Storey-height glazing with safety requirements in accordance with TRAV must

be secured individually with additional glazing clips.
5. The remaining 20 mm wide joint between the glass edges is closed with a PE
filling tape and sealed with silicone sealant: DOW CORNING, DC 795/DC 797
- SIKA AG, Elastosil 600/605.
24.2.1.4 Ventilation:
1. The faades must be designed according to the principle of overall ventilation.
For transom lengths > 1500 mm, there must be additional ventilation in the
centre of the field.
2. Profile face widths:

Mullion, transom 60 mm

235 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Profile basic depths:

Mullion 45 mm
Transom 45 mm
24.2.1.5 Fixings and Fastenings:

1. The Installation shall incorporate completely concealed fixings and fastenings
throughout.
2. These fixings and fastenings may include, but are not limited to, bolts,
anchors, brackets, packers, screws, rivets, studs, nuts, washers and
separators.
3. Where in exceptional cases it is accepted that exposed fixings or fastenings

are unavoidable, the Facade Contractor shall take particular care to design
and locate these to the complete satisfaction of the Design Team.
4. Any exposed fixings or fastenings within reach, shall be incapable of being

undone by hand or with the use of ordinary tools.
5. Any stainless steel fixings or fastenings shall be to BS EN 1SO 3506. grade

A2
6. Aluminium brackets, rivets and sheer pins to be to BS EN 755 (relevant

parts).
7. Sufficient adjustment to be provided in three dimensions to accommodate

building structure and fabrication/installation tolerances.
8. All brackets supporting the cladding shall transmit all loads to the structure
evenly and without hard point contact.
9. Shims under mounting brackets may be used where appropriate but they
must be mechanical secured to avoid migration due to building movement
and other dynamic effects.
24.2.1.6 Joints:
1. The Installation shall incorporate inconspicuous joints within and between
components which shall accommodate movement of the Installation and the
adjacent structure and / or construction, and which shall avoid distortion or
damage of the Installation or adjacent structure and / or construction.
Where movement joints are provided within the building structure or building
elements adjacent to the Installation, then the Installation shall incorporate
joints coincident with these.
2. All joints shall be plumb, true and square with the following specific
tolerances:
Deviations in width shall be gradual and less than 10% of the nominal joint
width.

236 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Deviations between the flat faces of adjacent components shall be less than
10% of the nominal joint width.
3. Joints between panels are to be strictly limited to those shown on the

drawings.
24.2.1.7 Jointing Materials:

1. Gaskets, sealants, glazing beads and glazing components shall be of
materials that do not react with aluminium, aluminium finishes, glass, glazing
materials, other building materials or each other.
2. Gaskets Material:
- Non cellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
3. Continuity:
External gaskets of the system and inner gaskets of drained and
ventilatedsystem must be formed in a complete frame with sealed joints.
Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory moulded corner joints.
24.2.1.8 TOLERANCE
direction.
foot) run.
24.3.1 GENERAL

237 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Dimensional verification measurementsprior to fabricating glass fin

b. Verify location of structural supports and roof anchoring and if their
corrected.
B. Coordination: Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with casting of concrete (

floor slabs), structural steel frame (roof), shelters cladding, ventilation plant etc.
24.3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Particularly:

238 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

D. Secure glass panels to fittings as in approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation

work with erection tolerances, Canopy installation works and sealing. Also coordinate
installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant involved.
1. Prior to erection, verify structural support system is within tolerances and

proper alignment.
2. During installation: Provide periodic inspection during installation.

recommendation.
Architect.

related finishes.
END OF SECTION

239 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25 SECTION 08 44 45 - Exterior Glass - Canopy
This Section includes Exterior Glass Canopy and accessories to be installed in secondary
shelters and where indicated.
Location:
Shelters: secondary shelters elevator fcanopy;


Defence Department.

version:
I. Section 1 General
J. Section 17 Metal works
K. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 3 Workmanship
L. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall

240 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Wind actions.
internal spaces.
installed.
2

241 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
11

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.


Labelling).


components.

11

242 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
project site.
E. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
F. 01 00 00 General requirements




243 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
sealing edge.
with exposed seals)
glazing factors
explosion pressure.
properties
for use;
25.1.4 SUBMITTALS
G. GSAS Design assessment

s. Intended list of materials

244 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
t.
recycle content.
u. Full representative panel assembly / quality sample;
v. Mock up.
w. QCD certification
x. Material / Component technical data with Health and Safety
requirements;
y. Material / Component / Assembly calculation.
z. Method statement for construction / installation.
aa. O&M manual and as built BIM and drawings
q. Bill of Quantities
r. List of materials
s. Specifications listing manufactures and locations
t. Cost estimates
u. Description of the material
v. Description of how the material has been reused
w. Report providing distances of manufacturers
x. Any documentation from manufacturers outlining third party sourcing
Certification
H. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

calculation report.
I. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ): Show fabrication, assembly and
each situation.
9. Installation procedures or erection sequence for
special conditions.

245 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P. Samples: Representative of finished product specified, two complete sets of color

particularly:
5. Glass fittings
6. Metal finishes
7. Sealants colors
and patterns.
Q. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
R. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
S. Test submittals:
k. Glass certifications on required glass properties
l. Fitting materials test report
m. Source quality control test reports.
n. Sealant adhesion field tests.
o. Field quality control test report
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and
engineer.
c. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

Work.
F. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be qualified according to:


246 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

K. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of Glazed Curtain Wall.

L. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

M. Mock-ups: Before installing Glazed Curtain Wall, build mock-ups for each form of
in related Division
be constructed.
N. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

E. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
damage.
on Shop Drawings.
materials units.

247 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

instructions.
transport.
F. Store materials in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation and
visible.
jurisdiction.
E. Environmental Limitations: For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's

F. Close areas to traffic during Glazed Curtain Wall installation and for appropriate time
E. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to

25.1.8 WARRANTY

25.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Laminated glass, installed horizontally on the canopy substructure is made of two layers of
8mm clear heat strengthened glass laminated with 1.52 PVB interlayers.

248 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25.2.1.1 Glass
Canopy laminated glass, is 8.8.4 heat strengthenedglass made of:
A. Two layers of heat strengthened 8 mm thick, clear glass (same colour of glazed
B. Four polyvinyl butyral interlayer (PVB) between glass sheets ( 4 interlayers x 2).
25.2.1.2 Adhesives


glass.

the drawings.
calculation.
25.2.2 TOLERANCE
Otherwise specified in shop-drawings or by manufacturer, installed system shall be less
than the limits specified herein.
1. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) deviation in 1 story height, in 3 m (10 foot) vertical,
angular run, or in 6 m (20 foot) horizontal run.

249 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Limit variations from location (theoretical calculated position in plan or elevation based
on established floor lines and column lines), including variations from plumb and level, to
the following:
2. Not more than 3 mm (1/8 inch) change in deviation for member for 3 m (10 foot)
run.
25.3.1 GENERAL
a. Dimensional verification measurements prior to fabricating glass fin structure
components
b. Verify location of structural supports and roof anchoring and if their position is
within tolerances and proper alignment.
2. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Coordination: Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with casting of concrete ( floor
slabs), structural steel frame (roof), shelters cladding, ventilation plant etc.
1. Structural steel frame: Ensure that metal profiles and plates, anchor bolts etc and
other structure components to be fixed to roof structures are provided, accurately
placed, and properly sized. Ensure that provision is made for attachments and
transfer of calculated loads.
25.3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Particularly:
C. Do not field cut or alter structural framing without written approval from manufacturer and
Architect.
D. Install structural glass in metal profiles and fittings as in manufacturers instructions and
in approved shop drawings.
E. Secure glass panels to fittings as in approved shop drawings.

250 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. Coordinate installation work with erection tolerances, Glazed Curtain Wall installation
works and sealing. Also coordinate installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant
involved.
G. Coordinate installation work with other related works.
25.3.2.1 Sealants:
A. Install sealants as indicated in shop drawings as required to achieve water and airtight
assembly, complying with requirements and instructions of curtain wall manufacturer.
B. Respect the application temperature (from 5 to 40 degrees C). At higher temperatures,

the crosslinking agents / catalysts may evaporate too quickly, thus disturbing the correct
silicone vulcanization.

alignment.
Architect.
B. Clean metal and glass surfaces complying with manufacturer's recommendations prior to
Touch up factory finish if necessary and authorized by engineer.

251 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Provide final protection and maintain protection and other precautions required to ensure
E. At the end of the installation, the Subcontractor shall provide the following administrative
END OF SECTION

252 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26 SECTION 08 44 45 - EXTERIOR GLASS - ELEVATOR

CANOPY
This Section includes Exterior Glass Canopy and accessories to be installed in secondary
shelters as elevator cladding and where indicated.
Location:
Shelters: secondary shelters elevator canopy;


Defence Department.

version:
M. Section 1 General
N. Section 17 Metal works
O. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 3 Workmanship
P. Section 25 Glass and glazing Part 4 Glazed Curtain Wall

253 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Wind actions.
internal spaces.
installed.
2

254 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.


Labelling).


components.

12

255 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
project site.
G. 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements
H. 01 00 00 General requirements




256 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
sealing edge.
with exposed seals)
glazing factors
explosion pressure.
properties
for use;
26.1.4 SUBMITTALS


257 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a.
Intended list of materials
b.
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
Certification

calculation report.
4. Anchorage and connection details, including dimensioning for sizing and setting
embedded items, expansion joints both vertically and horizontally. Locations
and details of connection hardware attached to structure
6. Jamb, head, sill, and corner conditions and specific anchorage details for each
situation.

258 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
T. Samples: Representative of finished product specified, two complete sets of color

particularly:
5. Glass fittings
6. Metal finishes
7. Sealants colors
and patterns.
U. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
V. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
W. Test submittals:
engineer.
d. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

Work.


259 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

O. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of Glazed Curtain Wall.

P. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

Q. Mock-ups: Before installing Glazed Curtain Wall, build mock-ups for each form of

in related Division
be constructed.
R. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

damage.
on Shop Drawings.
materials units.

260 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

instructions.
transport.
visible.
jurisdiction.


26.1.8 WARRANTY
26.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Laminated glass, installed horizontally on the canopy substructure is made of two layers of
6mm clear heat strengthened glass laminated with 1.52 PVB interlayers.

261 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26.2.1.1 Glass
Canopy laminated glass, is 6.6.4 heat strengthenedglassmade of:
A. Two layers of heat strengthened6 mm thick, clear glass (same colour of glazed
B. Four polyvinyl butyral interlayer (PVB) between glass sheets ( 4 interlayers).
26.2.1.2 Adhesives


glass.

the drawings.
calculation.
26.2.1.4 TOLERANCE
direction.

262 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
foot) run.
26.3.1 GENERAL
c. Dimensional verification measurementsprior to fabricating glass fin
d. Verify location of structural supports and roof anchoring and if their
corrected.
B. Coordination: Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with casting of concrete

( floor slabs), structural steel frame (roof), shelters cladding, ventilation plant etc.
26.3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Particularly:

263 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Do not field cut or alter structural framing without written approval from manufacturer
and Architect.
D. Install structural glass in metal profiles and fittings as in manufacturers instructions

E. Secure glass panels to fittings as in approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation

work with erection tolerances, Glazed Curtain Wall installation works and sealing.
Also coordinate installation with Mechanical & Electrical Plant involved.
F. Coordinate installation work with other related works.
26.3.2.1 Sealants:
A. Install sealants as indicated in shop drawings as required to achieve water and

airtight assembly, complying with requirements and instructions of curtain wall
manufacturer.
B. Respect the application temperature (from 5 to 40 degrees C). At higher

temperatures, the crosslinking agents / catalysts may evaporate too quickly, thus
disturbing the correct silicone vulcanization.
alignment.


recommendation.

264 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Architect.

related finishes.
END OF SECTION

265 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27 SECTION 26 50 05 - LIGHTING
27.1 PART 1 GENERAL
Furnishing, installing and connecting lighting and associated wiring and conduit. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
apply to this Section.
A. Elevator Light Linear Light
B. Continuous LED Lighting Canopy
C. Bollard Light
Location
Generalized on public area

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

Defence Department.
47.1.1.1 Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or whats equivalent in

latest version:
B. Section 21 Electrical works

266 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Attempts shall be made where possible to introduce natural lighting to enhance internal
spaces.
13

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.

[IEQ Credit 6.1] Controllability of Systems - Lighting.
Provide individual lighting controls for 90% (minimum) of the building occupants to enable
adjustments to suit individual task needs and preferences
13

267 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Labelling).


components.

project site.
A. 00 00 00 Procurement and contracting Requirements

268 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The material referred above shall obtain certicated by DVE.

All luminaires, wiring and installation of luminaires shall comply with current edition of
standards and regulations listed below:
International Standards
a) Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Condition Equipment, issued KAHRAMAA
b) Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS) 2014
c) BS EN 12464-1, Light and Lighting - Lighting of work places - Indoor work places. f)
Code for Interior Lighting; issued by the 'Chartered Institution of Building Services
Engineers (CIBSE & SLL)
d) BS4533: for luminaires
e) BS EN 60081, 61167: for fluorescent, high pressure and metal halide lamps.
f) BS EN 60529, Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
code)
g) BS EN, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
h) k) Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
For LED Luminaires
IEC 60598-1: Luminaires - Part 1: General requirements and tests
IEC 60598-2-1: Luminaires - Part 2 Particular requirements. Section 1: Fixed general
purpose luminaires
IES 60598-2-2: Luminaires - Part 2 Particular requirements. Section 2: Recessed
luminaires.
IEC 61347-1: Lamp control gear - Part 1: General and safety requirements; and
IEC 61347-2-13: Lamp control gear - Part 2-13: Particular requirements for D.C. or A.C.
supplied electronic control gear for LED modules;
IEC 62384: DC or AC supplied control gear for LED modules - Performance requirements;
IEC 61000-3-2 Class C: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for
theharmonic current emissions (equipment input current 16A per phase);
IEC 61547: Equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC immunity requirements; and
EN 55015: Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of
electrical lighting and similar equipment
IEC 62031: LED modules for general lighting safety specifications.
IEC 60838-2-2: Miscellaneous lamp-holders - Part2 - 2: Particular requirements -
Connectors for LED modules

269 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27.1.3 SUBMITTALS
Shop drawings - submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each
type building light fixture and component. Data shall include, but not be limited to, catalogue
number, certified photo-metrics by an independent source, lens/louver type, power supply
data, lamp socket type if applicable, lamp data and any other information necessary to
indicate compliance with the contract documents.
Submit light fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture,
assembled in "light fixture type" alphabetical and/or numerical order, with proposed light
fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. If initial submittals do not include all
information as specified, additional submittals shall be required until all have been approved
by the Architect
No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on the contract document
drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions on
the project, and then only with the written acceptance of the Architect. All variations must be
clearly indicated as such on the shop drawings submitted for approval.
For all light fixture types, and where shop drawings are not specifically indicated for
submission, submit standard drawings, or cut sheets, including product data and photometric
data.
Submit power manufacturers recommendations of maximum distance between lamps and
associated remote power supplies.
Maintenance data - Submit maintenance data and parts list for each light fixture and
accessory; Include that data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; Also
to include recommended maintenance requirements from the manufacturers of each light
fixtures type, including:
A quantity of two (2) of any special tools required.
Types of cleaners to be used.
Replacement parts identification lists and local contacts for all light fixtures,
including all lamping.
Recommended maintenance schedule and procedures.
Final as-built shop drawings for all light fixtures that required shop drawing
submittals.
Installer statement: - With all submittals, provide a statement declaring that the contractor has
coordinated all lighting light fixtures and light fixtures drawings with the drawings and details
of the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and other related trades to assure an
accurate and efficient installation.
Samples:
All samples should be supplied with the necessary equipment and power rating required for
operation and testing in the location of the project.
Upon approval of shop drawings and any other required submissions, the ontractor shall
submit fully complete samples of custom built products to the Employer and Lighting Designer
for final approval.
Alll samples and related componentry shall be submitted in accordance with this Specification and the
Luminaire Schedule.

270 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mock-ups:
The Contractor shall allow to temporarily install, connect and adjust any mock-ups required
and agreed to by Employer and Lighting Designer. All arrangements, including ordering,
delivery, associated safety precautions, installation and removal of the mock up luminaires
and associated equipment shall be the responsibly of the Contractor
Installer is solely responsible for quality control of the work. Comply with the requirments as
per Contract documents.
Materials equipment and installation shall conform to the latest edition of all applicable codes
and the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. All work shall be performed in strict
accordance with the building standards and the requirements of the local utility company.
Quality - All light fixtures, lamping, accessories, and materials, shall be new, of good quality,
and free from defects which in any manner may impair their character, appearance, strength,
durability and function.
Replacements of damaged light fixture - All blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory light

fixtures shall not be installed. All blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory light fixtures shall be
replaced in a satisfactory manner as directed by the Architect.
Approved alternate manufacturers - The lighting designated for this project is based on
light fixture types, and lamping, as specified. Identification of specified light fixtures by means
of manufacturers names and catalogue numbers is to establish basic features, aesthetics
and performance standards.
Where approved alternate manufacturers are listed for a particular light fixture type, an
alternate light fixture from that manufacturer may be submitted as a proposed alternate light
fixture to the one specified. The alternate light fixture must still meet all of the performance
requirements noted below in paragraph, Equality, and must be submitted for evaluation by the
Architect.
Where an approved alternate manufacturer and specific alternate light fixture catalog
numbers are listed for a particular light fixture type, the specified alternate light fixture from
that manufacturer may be submitted as an equal light fixture to the one specified. The light
fixture must still be submitted for review by the Architect.
Equality - Equality shall be determined by comparisons of actual light fixtures, and lamping,
and of the following light fixture and lamping characteristics. The Architect shall be the final
authority with respect to equality.
Performance:
Photometric data.
Distribution.
Utilization.

271 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Efficacy.
Efficiency.
Average brightness/maximum brightness.
Spacing to mounting height ratio.
Visual comfort probability.
Power supplies.
Heat dissipation.
Construction:
Engineering.
Workmanship.
Rigidity.
Types of materials
Thickness and gages of Light Fixture materials.
Light tightness, no light leaks will be accepted.
Permanence and quality of materials and finishes.
Physical Dimensions, both visible, and hidden from normal viewing.
Required clearance dimensions.
Maintenance:
Re-lamping ease
Replacement of transformers, ballasts, lamp sockets, and other components or
accessories.
Appearance.
Light Tightness
Aesthetic appearance.
Lamping:
Colour Rendering Index (CRI).

Colour Temperature (K).
Light Output, Mean and Initial Lumens.
Lamp Life, Rated Average Life (Hours).
Lamp Optics.
Physical Dimensions.
Voltage.
Regulatory requirements - Installer to verify with light fixture manufacturer and assure all
light fixtures do comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and
regulations as required by the project standards.
Light fixture components as plastic diffusers to be in compliance with the fire and safety
requirements NFPA130. Light fixture manufacturer to manufacture as per required NFPA130
fire and safety standards.

272 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light fixtures to be tested by Qatar Rails accepted Testing Laboratories. Contractor to

coordinate directly with light fixture manufactures to grant this approval process.
Escape light fixtures to be reviewed and approved by QCD. Supplier to coordinate directly
with light fixture manufactures to grant this approval process
Assurance - The supplier / installer shall warrant each light fixture, its finishes, and all of its
component parts, to be free from defects for a period equal to the period offered by the light
fixture manufacturer for each specific light fixture; from the date of acceptance if operated
within the rated voltage range. Replacement of faulty materials, and the cost of labour
required to make the replacement shall be the responsibility of the supplier / installer.
Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary site storage for all luminaires and associated
equipment. Contractor shall ensure appropriate handling, transportation and handling
measures are in place to avoid any damage.
Deliver light fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect

fixtures from damage. When possible, arrange for manufacturer to take back packaging
materials to be recycled or reused for this or another project.
Exposed finishes shall be protected during manufacture, transport, storage and handling.
Delivered materials shall be identical to the approved samples.
All luminaires shall be tagged and/or marked with type number as per the Lighting
Designers' Luminaire Schedule and Drawings, and indicate general location of installation.
Delivered luminaires shall be supplied with all necessary wiring, sockets, drivers, ballasts,
shielding, channels, lenses and other parts and appurtenances necessary for installation of
each luminaire type.
Store light fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.
Handle light fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not
install damaged units or components; replace with new.
Coordinate with other work including ceiling type, wires/cables, electrical boxes and light
fixtures, and raceways, to properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other
work.
Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
during remainder of construction.

273 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27.1.7 WARRANTY
27.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Provide light fixtures as shown on the drawings and schedules complete with all specified
lamps, completely wired, controlled and securely attached to supports. Including:
a. Light Fixture Types: Type of light fixtures shall be as indicated on the drawings and
as specified below in the Light Fixture Type Schedule.
b. Lamp holders as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the Lighting
Schedule.
c. Reflectors and baffles, anosized finish as, indicated on the drawings and as specified
below in the Lighting Schedule.
d. Lamps for each type of light fixtures shall be as indicated on the drawings and as
specified in the Lighting Schedule.
e. LED Luminaires marked in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60598-2-1 for
general-purpose luminaires of IEC 60598-2-2 for recessed luminaires
f. Electronic Drivers as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the Lighting

Schedule. The electronic driver ( driver) for the LED luminaire shall include the
components of power factor correction, radio interference suppression and also
dimming facility were and if it is specified.
g. LED Module as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the Lighting Schedule.
h. Exterior luminaries for outdoor application shall be designed and manufactured
specifically for outdoor purposes. Components, including nuts, bolts, rivets, springs,
and similar parts, shall be manufactured of materials with effective corrosion
resistance, or of materials which have been subjected to finishing treatment which will
ensure such resistance.
i. All in-ground luminaires, with an IP rating of 67 and 68 shall be equipped with anti-
leeching technology to avoid moisture ingress through thermal expansion and
contraction.
Coordinate installation, connection, and securing of all lighting light fixtures with adjacent
construction and with all other applicable trades to provide a total system that is complete and
finished in appearance.
Minor details, not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but that are necessary for
the proper execution, completion and installation of the light fixtures, shall be included, as if

274 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings.
Where any light fixtures type or lamping designated has been omitted or cannot be
determined by the installer, request a clarification from the Architect and provide the light
fixture type as directed. Where an inconsistency in the specifications and/or the drawings is
determined by the installer, request a clarification from the Architect and provide as directed.
Provide light fixtures of sizes, types and ratings indicated on Drawings.
All fixture shall be provided with label indicating the lamp voltage and wattage. Labels shall
be provided that indicate this information.
Reflectors, cones or baffles shall be absolutely free of spinning lines, ripples or any marks or
indentations caused by riveting or other assembly techniques. No rivets or hardware shall be
visible after installation.
Where modified light fixtures are specified, fixtures shall be modified as required with lamp
sockets positioned to provide desired photometric performance.
Where custom colour is indicated on the schedule, a colour other than the manufacturer's
standard will be required for all parts and components visible after installation. The finish
material will be of the same type and process as applied to the standard catalogued item.
Custom colours shall be factory finished.
Aluminium surfaces exposed to corrosive atmospheres shall receive a duranodic or polyester

powder paint finish for corrosion resistance.
Light fixture trims shall be provided to coordinate with the ceiling material.
Ferrous mounting hardware and accessories shall be finished using either a galvanic or
phosphate primer backed paint process to prevent corrosion and discoloration of plaster
surfaces.
Hardware: For steel and aluminium light fixtures, all screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening
and latching hardware shall be: stainless steel; cadmium; or equivalent. For stainless steel
light fixtures, all hardware shall be stainless steel.
Light leaks: Light fixtures shall be free of light leaks.
Light leaks between trims of recessed Light Fixtures and the surfaces they are mounted upon
shall not be acceptable.
Heat dissipation: Light fixtures shall be designed to provide sufficient heat dissipation and
ventilation of lamps and ballasts including vent holes where required.
Lamping: Lamping for each type of Light Fixture shall be as indicated on the drawings and as
specified in the light fixture schedule.
Voltage: Voltages for each light fixture type shall be as indicated on the drawings and
schedules.
Where indicated recessed luminaries shall have housing accessible from below to provide
through access to power supplies where an accessible panel is not foreseen.

275 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
27.2.2.1 LED Performance Criteria

The performance of the LED luminaire and self-ballasted LED lamp shall comply with the
a) Luminaire efficacy (lumen/watt):

The luminaire efficacy of different types of luminaires under different colour temperatures
to be used on the Contract shall be provided to indicate its performance. Luminaire
efficacy shall not be lower than 100lumen/watt including ballast, thermal and luminaire
losses
b) Lumen maintenance (L70):

The lumen output of LED lighting source shall deliver at least 70% of its initial lumen
output of the operating 50,000 hours and 35,000 hours for LED luminaire and self-
ballasted LED lamp respectively. For compliance with the L70 threshold lumen
maintenance requirement, the lumen maintenance data of each colour temperature LED
light source using 6,000 hours is acceptable for projecting the L70. The required lumen
maintenance at 6,000 hours shall not be less the 94.1% and 91.8% for L70 = 50,000
hours and L70 = 35,000 hours respectively.
c) Colour Rendering Index (CRI)

CRI shall be a minimum of 85 for colour temperatures from 2700K - 6000K for indoor
luminaires and self-ballasted LED lamp.
d) Power Factor
The power factor of the LED luminaire circuit and self-ballasted LED lamp shall be a
minimum 0.9 and minimum 0.7 respectively.
e) Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) and its tolerance limit:

The nominal CCT of the LED light source shall meet 5% of the specified colour
temperature in the Luminaire Schedule.
Each model of LED luminaire of self-ballasted LED lamp shall be tested to comply with the
above performance requirements. The Contractor shall submit the test report from the
accredited laboratories to certify each model of LED luminaire or self-ballasted LED lamp
complying with the standards proposed by the Contractor and agreed by the Lighting
Designer.
27.3.1 GENERAL
Examine areas and conditions under which light fixtures are to be installed, and substrate for
supporting light fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
27.3.2 INSTALLATION
27.3.2.1 Light Fixtures
Coordination - Refer to respective reflected ceiling plan for each area. Reflected ceiling plans
indicate proper light fixture location. Drawings and schedules indicate light fixture
characteristics type, quality, quantity, etc. Verify with the ceiling supplier the type and design
of actual ceiling installed in each area and coordinate compatible light fixture flange.

276 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coordinate compatibility of lamp, power supplies , control systems, and associated start--
up/commissioning per manufacturers recommendations and warrantees. Be responsible for
any failures or premature lamp-life reductions resulting in correction of the same.
Store all luminaries and accessories in a secure, dry, heated location protected from dust, dirt
and moisture, in the original cartons.
All light fixtures in one room are the same type, unless otherwise indicated.
Make installation such that the light fixture is free of finger marks, flaws, scratches, dents or
other imperfections.
Install lighting Light Fixtures in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
and instructions.
Provide adequate and sturdy support for each lighting light fixture. Provide all appurtenances
required for the proper, safe and distortion-free installation of all Light Fixtures in the various
surfaces in which they appear. Determine surface types from the architectural drawings.
All light fixture, once lamped and tested, shall remain off for the duration of construction.
Light Fixtures shall not be used as construction work lights by the installer for any duration of
time.
Do not install light fixture parts such as: finishing plates; trims; reflector cones; baffles;
aperture plates, light controlling elements for air-handling light fixture; or decorative elements,
until after plastering, painting, completions of ceiling tiles, other work that may mar light
fixture, and general clean up, has been completed.
Clean light fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean
fingerprints and smudges from lenses, baffles and/or louvers.
Light Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in
operation. If light fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the
installer shall clean them at no additional cost to the Owner
Where possible protect installed light fixtures from damage during remainder of construction
period.
Locations of light fixtures are shown on drawings. Verify exact quantities, location and
spacing with the architectural drawings and other reference data before ordering of light
fixtures and during installation.
27.3.2.2 Lighting Control System

Lighting control panels (LCP's)
Lighting control panel (LCP) type and finishes are to be as per the Control System Schedule
or drawings.
Lighting Programming Sockets (LPS)
Lighting Programming Sockets are to be supplied and installed as per the Control
SystemSchedule or drawings.
Sensors
Contactor shall supply and install all sensors as per the types specified in the Lighting Control
System schedule or drawings. All sensors shall be interfaced with the Building Automation
and Control System
Photocell Devices
Photocell devices are to be supplied and installed as per the Control System Schedule or

277 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
drawings. The accuracy of the photocell device shall be within 5% with no moving parts. The
photocell unit shall be weatherproof constructed to IP54. Additional circuitry shall be provided
to achieve a delay, adjustable from 0-30 seconds so as to eliminate switching due to lightning
or other short period changes in illumination. The Photocell device shall be the fail-safe type
with a range of switch-on values between 50lux and 1000lux, and an ON/OFF ration of 1:1.5.
Building Automation & Control System (BACS) and Control Protocol
All required lighting controllers including: DALI, DMX, Leading & Lagging Edge Dimmers,
Relays and Contactors are to integrated with the Automation & Control System (BACS).
All luminaires are to be dimmable using the protocol specified in the luminaire schedule.
Where "tuneable" LED technology is specified, the appropriate protocol, including DALI &
DMX, and dimming technology shall be integrated and interfaced with the BACS
The BACS shall provide dedicated and programmable Timeclock control to all Front of House
(FOH) lighting.
The BACS/ lighting control system must provide an override function for all sensor-type
devices such as Passive Infrared (PIR), Sonic, Photocell, etc.
Zoned Lighting & Proposed Circuits
All FOH lighting shall be controlled in "zones" to allow individual control of specific areas.
Refer to Lighting Load and Control Intent Schedule for details
The lighting documentation, including drawings and schedules, indicate the proposed
grouping of lights to enable adequate control over certain areas, zones and lights. The
Contractor shall coordinate and verify all load requirements, proposed circuiting/grouping of
lights with the Electrical Engineer prior to bidding and installation.
Operation times
During the hours which the station is open and operational all lights shall be in 'ON' mode
(except those controlled by sensors) in order to comply with the lighting and uniformity levels
specified in the Employer's Requirements. Refer also to the 'Lighting Load and Control Intent
Schedule' for a more detailed summary of the control intent.
During the hours which the station is closed, it is intended that half of the total station FOH
lighting will be required. Refer to the Lighting Load and Control Intent Schedule for details.
Refer also to the 'Lighting Load and Control Intent Schedule' for a more detailed summary of
the control intent.
Dimming
All FOH zones and circuits shall be dimmable and connected to an appropriate controller with
dimming capability. Set dimmed levels and "scenes" may be required after installation to suit
site-specific characteristics. The lighting "scenes shall be programmed/ commissioned to
meet the requirements of the Employer and Lighting Designer prior to project completion.
Lighting Levels
Programming the light levels of certain zones may be required at the commissioning stage in
order to resolve any illumination levels which may appear inconsistent. The calculation
results, shown in the 'Lighting Design Report' indicate areas where this treatment may be
required. At the time of commissioning, the Contractor shall allow suitable manpower and
equipment necessary to adjust, test and set the lighting levels accordingly.
27.3.2.3 Adjustments
Under the supervision and direction of the Lighting Designer the Contractor shall provide
manpower and tools for final focusing and adjustment for all adjustable fixtures prior to
Substantial Completion. If the Lighting Designer requests additional adjustments after

278 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Substantial Completion due to schedule conflicts and/or unsatisfactory results of earlier

adjustments, the Contractor will provide appropriate manpower and tools at no additional cost
to Owner.
27.3.2.4 Demonstration
Upon completion of installation of luminaries, and after building circuitry has been energized,
apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where
possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
27.3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ESCAPE LIGHTING
Escape Lighting Tests: After escape lighting units have been installed and building circuits
have been energized apply and interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation.
Replace malfunctioning units with new units and proceed with retesting. Give the Architect
advance notice of dates and time for all field tests. Provide instruments as required to make
positive observation of test results.
At the end of the installation, the Subcontractor shall provide the following administrative and
procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, including preparing
and submitting Instruction Manuals covering the care, preservation, and maintenance of the
mechanical and architectural products and related finishes.
END OF SECTION

279 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28 SECTION 10 82 15 - EXTERNAL GRILLS
This section describes external grills at Elevator for buildings exterior and includes all
standards, material, equipment, labor and service necessary according with drawings.
Location
GRADE LEVEL - Public area - secondary shelters - Elevators
28.1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS ( hierarchy of codes asemployer requirements)

NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations
28.1.2.2 Qatar Civil Defense Fire Safety Standards (Qcdfss )

Defence Department.

version
C. Section 17 Part 5 Light Metal Support and Cladding System
D. Section 22 Air conditioning, refrigeration and ventilation

280 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.13.1.2 Safety: Non-combustible and Non-Toxic conforming to all applicable

standards and codes to meet or exceed the appropriate standards
4.13.1.3 Economy: Cost-effective and, to a consistent level of quality, commonly
available and not restricted to a few suppliers based on current industry levels
of technology and local building practice. Proven in use, they will not required
new research, designs or manufacturing techniques.
humidity, temperature change, sunlight and the marine atmosphere. Colour
and appearance shall remain unchanged during the life cycle of the material.
standard cleaning equipment and agents. Repair and replacement with regards
to the availability of material in the region shall be considered in the selection
of materials.
4.14.13.6 Non-reflecting surfaces in the room shall be of the following reflectance
degrees:
A.Ceiling 70 %
B.Walls 50 %
C.Partition Walls 20-50%

b) Materials & Products must be assembled as a finished product within the region to be
considered locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
Verify and document the post- and Pre-consumer content of recycled material through
manufacturer or supplier specifications.
a) All indoor materials and finishes shall be verified the VOC content (Refer to attached VOC
Limit).
14

281 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Labelling).


components.

project site.

282 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


The material referred above shall obtain certicated by DVE.

order to give evidence of the compliance with the Employer Requirements
- ISO 14001.2004 - Environmental management systems -- Requirements with guidance
for use
- ISO 9001:2008 - Quality management systems -- Requirements
28.1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. GSAS Design assessment

recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
standards such ISO Certification and other environmental certifications.
C. Product Data: For galvanized steel grills, accessories and installations materials.

283 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Shop Drawings ( BIM model and dwgs ) : Include plans, elevations, sections, all
framing, fixings, bracketry and support, detailed and attachments to other Work.
E. Samples: Representative set of samples of manufacturer's standard and/or bespoke

products for colour and textures approval. Include samples of accessories involving
colour selection.
Set of samples and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers
and owners, and any other information required by Contractor.
G. External grills manufacturer's complete installation instructions.
H. External grills manufacturer's complete cleaning and maintenance manuals.
G. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and
is experienced in manufacturing External grills indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
3. Assumes responsibility for External grills to comply with performance

requirements.
4. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying

the Work.
H. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be qualified according to:

4. Environmental Management System complying with the program described
in ISO 14000-2004, or similar system;
5. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of External grills

materials. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricators
certification is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of contracted
work. Production will not be allowed to re-start until the necessary
corrections are made and certification has been re-established. In the event
certification(s) cannot be re-established in a timely manner, causing project
delays, the fabricator, at no additional cost, will contract out the remainder
of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified plant.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to applicable

national industry standars
D. Grilles and diffusers tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70-72,
ADC Test Code 1062-GRD and ISO 3741 or have ARI certification
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories certifications and data sheet.

284 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Deliver materials in original packages with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's

labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and handling. Protect
packaged materials from dirt and damage during handling and transport
B. Store materials in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation

and to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
Remove envelopes and packaging materials at installation
B. Environmental Limitations:
3. For proprietary products, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
for installation procedures.
4. Delimit and limit areas to traffic during installation.
28.1.7 WARRANTY
28.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Stationary louvres for air intake.
28.2.1.1 external grills

Drainable blades shall be contained within the frame with downspouts in jambs and mullions.
Standard or flanged construction as scheduled or required.
28.2.1.2 Frame:
Wall Thickness: 18 gage (1.3 mm), nominal.
Material:Roll formed galvanized steel.
28.2.1.3 Blades:
Style: Drainable. 37-1/2 degree angle on 4 3/4 inches (121 mm) centers.
Wall Thickness: 18 gage (1.3 mm), nominal.
Material:Roll formed galvanized steel.
Minimum assembly size: 12 inches wide by 12 inches high (305 mm x 305 mm).

285 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum Factory Assembly Size, 120w x 90h (3048 x 2286) or 90w x 120h 92286
x 3048)
.
28.2.1.4 Metal Accessories

Sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for
installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-corrosive, size
and gage as required for performance.
28.2.1.5 Performance Data

Louvers shall be factory engineered to withstand the specified seismic loads.
Minimum design loads shall be calculated to comply with ASCE 7, or local requirements of
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
28.2.2 GENERAL
A. Inspect areas to receive louvers. Notify the Architect of conditions that would
adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the louvers. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. If opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect

ofunsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Clean opening thoroughly prior to installation.
D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for

achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
28.2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install louvers at locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install louvers plumb, level, in plane of wall, and in alignment with adjacent work.
B. Clean louver surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

286 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion
END OF SECTION

287 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29 SECTION 32 14 05 - EXTERNAL NATURAL STONE FLOOR
This section include floor stone tiles work, including trim, base and accessories are shown on
the Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required
to complete the Work.
B. External Natural stone floor, Desert Brown Granite Stone, Flamed
47.1.3 National Fire Protection Association ( Nfpa )


version:
D. Section 1 General
E. Section 27 Part 2 Block Paved Areas

288 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

materials.
4.13.4.1 Flooring shall ensure excellent wearing quality through the use of the most durable
materials. The selected flooring for public areas shall have a dense, low absorption
and soil resistant surface providing good traction for passengers, without danger of
stumbling or vibrations which would impede the progress of roll chair users. Anti-slip
properties shall be according to the technical specifications. All public areas shall
have at least slip resistance class R10. Ancillary spaces shall have at least R9.
Areas where water spillage on the floor surface is possible e.g. station entrances,
shall have R12. Nominations given in R are according to the German regulation
Berufsgenossenschaftsrichtlinie (BGR) BGR 181
4.13.4.2 Due to economic grounds the coefficient of reflection within underground stations
shall be at least 0.25 measured according to the technical specifications; highly
reflective floor materials are however, to be avoided.

289 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
[M.6] Design for Disassembly
a) Building elements and components-including structure, finishing materials and equipment-should
have the ability to be easily separated and disassembled.
b) To facilitate disassembly include the use of modular components, movable partitions and bolted
connections or fastening systems for the structure and/or building envelope.
[M.7] Life Cycle Assessment (LCA)
a) Provide approved Environmental Product Declarations (EPD) for materials from a Certification Body.


Labelling).

15

290 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
components.

project site.

47.1.3.6 Qatar Civil Defence Authority (Qcdd)


47.1.3.8 Other Requirements

- ISO 14000-2004 - Environmental management systems -- Requirements with
guidance for use
- ISO 9001-2000 - Quality management systems Requirements
- ASTM C615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone
- ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
29.1.2 SUBMITTALS
H. GSAS Design assessment

a.Intended list of materials

291 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
b.Documentation outlining all applicable materials and the percent of the

recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
a.Bill of Quantities
b.List of materials
c.Specifications listing manufactures and locations
d.Cost estimates
e.Description of the material
f.Description of how the material has been reused
g.Report providing distances of manufacturers
h.Any documentation from manufacturers outlining thirdparty sourcing
Certification
I. Manufactures Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions

for all materials required, except bulk materials; transmit a copy of each instruction
to the installer. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with
requirements.
J. Submit representative samples ( 3m x 3m ) of each element that is to be used in the

finished work, showing the full range of colour and finish variations expected.
5. Review will be for color, pattern texture and dimensions.
6. For each tile type specified, minimum 3 samples with actual size indicating full
range of colors and finishes.
7. For each grout type specified, minimum 50 mm long samples indicating
manufacturer's full range of available colors.
8. For each accessory specified 2 units or two 300 mm long samples of linear
accessories. Also, submit 150 mm long sample of threshold.
K. Set of sample and array shall be delivered within 90 days before installation.
L. Shop Drawing ( BIM model and dwgs ): Indicate tile layout, patterns, color
arrangement, perimeter conditions, and junctions with dissimilar materials, control
and expansion joints, thresholds, accessories, and setting details.
M. Quality control Submittals:

5. Contractor's certification that products of this Section, as provided, meet or
exceed specified requirements.
6. Manufacturers of products of this Section meet specified qualifications.
7. Installers of products of this Section meet specified qualifications.

292 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Manufacturers certifications that materials are suitable for intended use.
N. Extra Materials:
2. Provide wrapped, packaged and labelled extra material consisting of three
pieces of each type, size and configuration of stone used ont the project.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall develop and
propose programs and methods of construction and testing to achieve the specified
quality to the approval of Project owner & Engineer.
G. Quality assurance
6. Comply with the applicable provisions of the standards and specifications.
7. Provide materials obtained from only one source and from the same
manufactured lot for each type and color of tile.
8. Cut natural stone shall be standard grade, free of flaws, reeds, rifts,
laminations, cracks, seam, starts or other defects which may impair its
strength, durability, or function. Exposed surfaces shall be free from spots,
spalls, chips, stains, discoloration or other defects which are not within the
approved sample range and would affect its appearance.
9. Color texture and finish of the stone shall be within the range of approved
samples.
10. Source: Provide stone units, which are the products of one supplier and one
quarry as specified. Stone material shall comply with the relevant standards.
H. Allowable variations in finished work shall not exceed the following deviations from
level of plumb and elevations, locations, slopes, and alignments shown:
2. Floors: 3 mm in 3 m run, any direction, 3 mm at any location, 0.8 mm offset
at any location.
I. Maintain one copy of followings on site.

4. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
Section with minimum 5 years experience.
5. Tile and Dimension Stone Manufacturer : Minimum 5 years documented
experience producing respective products specified in this Section.
6. Setting Materials and Grout Materials Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have
minimum 5 years documented experience producing respective products
specified in this section.
J. Mock-Up
3. The Contractor shall construct mock-up panel using materials specified for final
work.
4. The Contractor shall construct mock-up as directed, at location indicated or
directed, and of full thickness and obtain Project Owner & Engineer
acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up.
The Contractor shall deliver, handle and store equipment and material units in as the

293 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Deliver materials on site a minimum of 24 hours before use.
F. Deliver packaged materials and store in a dry place in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
G. Prevent damage to materials such as chipping, breakage, freezing, or excessive

heat. Prevent contamination by water, moisture, foreign matter, or other causes.
H. Protect adhesives from overheating. Store in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
F. Temperature shall not be less than 10C during the work and for 7 days after
completion.
G. The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting during the work.
H. The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation when using organic grouts.
I. The Contractor shall not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
J. Uniform curing conditions shall be provided or maintained at the job-site.
47.1.4 WARRANTY
29.2.1 DESCRIPTION
E. Cut natural stone shall be of sound flat surface, free from foreign matter, veins, hair-
cracks and pits.
F. Cut natural stone shall have edges in good condition and without any broken
corners.
G. Granite Dimension Stone

11. Granite shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C615.
12. Size, Color, Pattern, Texture and Finish: Refer to secondary shelters
Drawings.
13. Provide granite of the highest density available for the particular type selected,
free from imperfections and even texture.
14. Obtain granite from one quarry with consistent color range and texture
throughout the work.

294 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15. Provide granite cut from sound stock with even texture, shade and marking,
and free from imperfections.
16. Finishes: As indicated on Drawings.
17. Provide granite to the shapes and sizes indicated on the Drawings with length
and width dimensions of each individual slab within plus or minus 1 mm and
thickness within 2 mm from those specified.
18. Granite for Stairs: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, marble shall be 40
mm thick for treads with non-slip inserts and 20 mm thick for risers and
landings. as shown on Drawings.
19. Granite for external paving shall be of dimensions and pattern as indicated on
Drawings, thickness not less than 30 mm unless otherwise noted on drawings.
20. Granite shall be laid with matching grain and color.
H. Natural stone Paving in project are follows:

2. ABM CODE:S51 Desert Brown Granite, flamed
29.2.1.1 Setting Materials

Portland Cement Mortar:
A. The Contractor shall provide portland cement mortar only where indicated or
detailed.
B. Cement shall be ordinary portland cement and shall comply with SSA 143.
C. Sand may be natural or manufactured. It shall comply with ASTM C144, and shall
be clear, sharp, and fine aggregate as per grading.
D. Water shall be clear and without deleterious substances which would impair
strength and durability of mortar or grout. All containers for water storage shall be
clean and sun protected.
47.1.4.1 Sealants
E. Epoxy poly-sulphide sealant.
F. Polyurethane sealant.
G. Poly-sulphide sealant.
H. Silicone sealant.
C. Division Strips
1. Division strips to separate floor tiles from other floor finishes shall be 13 mm
high by 40 mm wide; 3 mm cross section at top edge with integral provisions
for anchorage in mortar bed or to substrate and shall be made of:
a. Stainless steel.
b. Aluminum.
D. Spacers shall be of plastic and size shall be as specified in manufacturer's printed

installation instructions for tile thicknesses and joint widths indicated.
E. Neutral liquid cleaner.

295 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. Heavy-duty, non-staining construction paper with compatible masking tape.

Petrographyc name
material.
172 Mpa
ASTM C170
Density 3
2630 Kg/m
ASTM C97
weight) 0.34 %
ASTM C 97
ASTM C241

Flexural strength
C880 25.8 MPa

2
SAMPLE TO BE PROVIDED
47.1.6 TOLERANCE
C. All arises shall be clean, plane and of uniform dimension. Wearing surface areas
shall not be less than 70% of the plan area.
3. Tolerances: Length& Width +/- 2mm
4. Thickness +/- 3mm
D. All installed/rectified tiles shall be installed without pillow edges.

296 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29.3.1 GENERAL
47.1.6.1 Inspection
G. The Contractor shall examine surfaces to receive tiles, setting beds, and
accessories before commencing tile work and make sure that the deviations are
within allowable tolerances for setting beds by portland cement mortar and dry-
sets methods.
H. Non-conforming surfaces shall be rectified to the satisfaction of Project Owner &

Engineer, before proceeding with the tile work.
I. The Contractor shall verify that:

6. Surfaces are firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films.
7. Sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair
bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.
8. Concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within
limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
9. Horizontal substrates are formed to required slopes.
10. Locations and widths of required expansion joints are as per Contract
Drawings.
J. Electrical and mechanical items, grounds, anchors, supports, plugs, hangers etc.
to be installed in coordination with the work of other trades shall be in correct
place before proceeding with the tile work.
K. Installer's Examination
3. The installer shall examine conditions under which construction activities of this
Section are to be performed, including but not limited to conditions specified in
paragraph above, and submit written notification if substrates or conditions are
unacceptable.
4. The Contractor shall transmit 2 copies of installer's report to Project Owner &
Engineer within 24 hours of receipt of report.
L. Beginning construction activities of this Section indicates the Contractors
acceptance of substrates and conditions under which construction activities of
this Section are to be performed.
47.1.6.2 Preparation
The Contractor shall:

D. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
E. Neutralize, seal, and prepare substrates to receive tile in accordance with ANSI
A108.1 through A108.7 as applicable and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations of proprietary setting beds.
F. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to
acceptable flatness tolerances.
G. Cementitious Substrates
1. Grind high spots of concrete slabs to achieve specified tolerances.

297 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Install specified underlayment to bring horizontal substrates to specified

tolerances.
3. Clean surfaces free of dust and debris; acid-etch concrete slabs.
29.3.2 INSTALLATION
47.1.6.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION

Setting of Floors in Portland Cement Mortar Bed:
A. Saturate concrete subfloor with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply slush coat of cement grout over surface of concrete subfloor about 15 minutes
prior to placing of setting bed. Limit area to avoid its drying out prior to placing of
setting bed. Slush coat shall be properly mixed and shall not exceed the thickness of
1.5 mm.
C. Mix setting bed in proportions by volume of one part of cement to 3 parts of sand
(measured in damp loose condition) to the quantity of water to produce a stiff mixture
with a moist surface when setting bed is ready to receive flooring.
D. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness indicated to produce sub-grade
elevations required for accurate setting of tiles to finished floor elevations shown. Mix
and place only the amount that can be covered with prior to initial set. Cut back, bevel
edge, remove and discard setting bed which has reached initial set prior to the
placing of tiles.
E. Butter backs of flooring units with skim coat of neat cement and water just prior to
placing it on bed.
F. Tamp flooring units until firmly bedded to proper finished floor elevations indicated
also set and level each unit in single operation. Do not return to areas already set and
disturb for leveling purposes prior to initial set of cement bed.
G. Where blocks/slabs do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such as
manholes or up-stands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks/slabs. Blocks/slabs
shall only be cut using a saw - no guillotine cutters shall be allowed on this site. Any
damaged or broken blocks/slabs shall not be laid. Any blocks/slabs damaged during
compaction shall be replaced.
Grouting Floors
A. Mix grout in proportion, by volume of one part Portland cement to 2 parts fine
aggregate (measured in damp loose conditions). Except for thin joints with fine sand,
reduce fine aggregate proportion to one part. Add liquid admixtures in proportion and
concentration as per manufacturer's recommendations. Select grout materials to
match the approved samples.
B. Grout joints in flooring units, except at expansion and control joints indicated to be
filled with sealant. Fill all gaps to produce a finished joint which is uniform in color,
smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.
C. Remove grout spillage from face of stone as the work progresses.

298 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Cure grout by maintaining in a moist condition for not less than 7 days.
47.1.6.4 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINT

A. Form expansion and control joints as per specs.
B. Except where saw-cut cold expansion joints are indicated on the Contract Drawings,
provide expansion control joints where tile abuts vertical surfaces, dissimilar surfaces,
where structural joints or changes of materials occur in tile
C. Substrate, as indicated on drawings, and as follows:

a) Tile Expansion Joints over Structural Joints: Provide joint in tile same width
as structural joint.
b) Provide tile edge each side of tile expansion joint for thickset tile
installation.
c) Provide where indicated, removable divider strips of the same depth as the
finished tile including setting bed. Remove strips after grouting. Seal joints with
sealant as specified .
D. The contractor shall follow grout specification and/or manufacturers

recommendations for cleaning of tile after grouting. Final clean-up shall be done by
finishing or polishing with a terry cloth or similar pad.
E. The contractor shall clean grout and setting materials from face of tile while materials
are workable. Leave tile face clean and free of all foreign material. Clean sealer from
faces of tile. Except as specifically recommended by both tile manufacturer and
grout materials manufacturer, acid cleaning of tile and grout surfaces is prohibited.
F. The contractor shall unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when
permitted by the tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner
than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous
plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush the surface with clean water
before and after cleaning.
G. Polish surface of tile work with soft cloth.
47.1.6.5 PROTECTION
D. The contractor shall apply to all clean completed tiled works a protective coat of
neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to 1 part water or as specified by the
manufacturer of the cleaner.
E. The contractor shall protect installed work with craft paper or other heavy covering
during the construction period to prevent damage.
F. The contractor shall remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from all tile
surfaces, before final inspection.
G. Prohibit foot and wheeled traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days, preferably 7
days.

299 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
H. Where use of newly tiled floors with cement type grout is unavoidable, use shall be
permitted 3 days after the installation, only if minimum of 25 mm thick and 550 mm
wide flat boards are placed in walkways and wheel ways.
I. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or
otherwise defective work.
END OF SECTION

300 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30 SECTION 32 16 15 - STONE CURB
30.1 PART 1 GENERAL
This section include stone curbs at canopy flooring as specified on Drawings.
Location
Secondary Shelter entrance
order to give evidence of the compliance to the Employer Requirements and to the previous
Codes.



version:
B. Section 5 Concrete
C. Section 6 Part 8 Roadworks- Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas.

301 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not restricted to a few suppliers based on current industry levels of technology and local
building practice. Proven in use, they will not required new research, designs or
qualities. They are to be resistant to abrasion, impact, vandalism, humidity, temperature
change, sunlight and the marine atmosphere. Colour and appearance shall remain
unchanged during the life cycle of the material.
4.13.1.5 Aesthetics: Emphasis shall be laid on clear, simple use of materials and
avoidance of overstatement in design. Also to be avoided are short-lived or
ephemeral design fashions or fads, pastiche and applied ornamentation.
Stations are to provide a comfortable and controlled environment and are to be
bright, colorful and welcoming. Attempts shall be made where possible to
introduce natural lighting to enhance internal spaces.
cleaning equipment and agents. Repair and replacement with regards to the availability
of material in the region shall be considered in the selection of materials.
16
locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.
[M.6] Design for Disassembly
a) Building elements and components-including structure, finishing materials and equipment-should
have the ability to be easily separated and disassembled.
b) To facilitate disassembly include the use of modular components, movable partitions and bolted
connections or fastening systems for the structure and/or building envelope.
[M.7] Life Cycle Assessment (LCA)
a) Provide approved Environmental Product Declarations (EPD) for materials from a Certification Body.
16

302 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Labelling).


components.

project site.

C. 01 00 00 General requirements

303 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



30.1.3 SUBMITTALS
The sign subcontractor shall submit the below list of document prior to fabrication
recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
Certification
B. Shop drawings indicating all dimensions of modules proposed for use, including
composition of the various elements.
C. Copies of all test reports indicating mix components and test results in compliance
with specification requirements.
D. The Contractor shall submit samples of stone curbs and stoppers for approval of
quality, color, finish and texture.

304 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements

and is experienced in manufacturing stone curbs and products similar to those
1. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without

delaying the Work.
1. Quality Management System complying with the program described in

2. Environmental Management System complying with the program
described in ISO 14000-2004, or similar system;
C. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of the stone curbs units.
Production shall immediately stop if at any time the fabricators certification is revoked,
regardless of the status of completion of contracted work. Production will not be
allowed to re-start until the necessary corrections are made and certification has been
re-established. In the event certification(s) cannot be re-established in a timely manner,
causing project delays, the fabricator, at no additional cost, will contract out the
remainder of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified plant

E. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain natural stone curbs from single source from single quarry with
resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
2. Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each cementitious component
from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or
producer.
3. Obtain each type of stone accessory, sealant, and other material from a
single manufacturer for each product.
F. Mock-ups: Before installing stone curbs, build mock-ups for each form of construction
and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate finished joints, aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated
for the completed Work:
1. Build mock-up of typical flooring area as shown on Drawings as part of
building.
2. Build mock-ups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups
will be constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mock-ups before starting installation.

305 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged
or undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
K. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site to

comply with requirements of Project Management and Coordination
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken,

bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage,
mixing with other components, and application.
Handle and transport natural stone curb units and related materials paying
attention to avoid excessive stresses, deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other
causes.
1. Lift stone curbs with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that
might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned
wood supports.
2. Store stone curbs on wood skids or pallets with non-staining, waterproof
covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone.
Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
3. Lift or support units only at points indicated on Shop Drawings.
4. Place non-staining resilient spacers of even thickness between panels units.
5. During shipment and transport, support panels units on non-staining shock-
absorbing material.
6. Protect materials from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with
designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units.
C. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration and to protect from contact with soil, staining, and physical damage.
1. Store stone curb units with non-staining resilient supports in same positions
as when transported.
2. Store stone curb units on firm, level and smooth surfaces.
3. Place stored stone curb units so identification marks are clearly visible.
E. Handling: Handle stone curbs carefully to avoid distorting and damage to edges,
corners and finished surfaces.

written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content,
ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting
natural stone cladding system performance.

306 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Close areas to traffic during natural stone cladding system installation and for
appropriate time period after installation as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
30.1.7 WARRANTY

30.2.1 DESCRIPTION
The natural stone in this section - DESERT BROWN GRANITE stone - shall be on sample
selection.
30.2.1.1 Stone curbs

Stone curb are Desert Brown Granite stone. Being a natural material it could vary in colour
veining and in technical charactertics as related to quarry location.
Dimension: 570x150 mm otherwise specified in drawings
Finish: as per sample selection and/or as per drawing
Final approval of the curbs will be given by the Engineer:
30.2.1.2 Setting Materials

Portland Cement Mortar:
E. The Contractor shall provide portland cement mortar only where indicated or
detailed.
F. Cement shall be ordinary portland cement and shall comply with SSA 143.
G. Sand may be natural or manufactured. It shall comply with ASTM C144, and shall
be clear, sharp, and fine aggregate as per grading.
H. Water shall be clear and without deleterious substances which would impair
strength and durability of mortar or grout. All containers for water storage shall be
clean and sun protected.
30.2.1.3 Sealants
I. Epoxy poly-sulphide sealant.
J. Polyurethane sealant.
K. Poly-sulphide sealant.
L. Silicone sealant.

307 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Petrographyc name
material.
172 Mpa
ASTM C170
Density 3
2630 Kg/m
ASTM C97
weight) 0.34 %
ASTM C 97
ASTM C241

Flexural strength
C880 25.8 MPa

2
30.2.3 TOLERANCE
Laid to the lines and grades shown on Drawings with a tolerance of plus or minus 3 mm.
30.3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Elements shall be set out to lines and grades as x drawing. Under no circumstances
shall levels be set by direct measurement.
B. Foundation shall be excavated to the grades and sections shown and fully compacted
and rolled to a smooth surface. Concrete shall not be placed until the foundation has
been approved.

308 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Elements shall be laid either directly on a wet concrete base or on 1-3 cement-sand
mortar bed, 20 mm thick on a previously laid concrete base. Base shall be constructed
of Class 20 concrete.
D. After elements have been laid, continuous concrete backing shall be poured. Backing
concrete shall be of Class 20 conforming to the requirements .
E. Joints between curbs and paving tiles shall have a width of 4 mm, filled with 1-1
cement-sand mortar with one fifth hydrated lime and sufficient water to make the
mixture plastic and easily smoothed and finished.
F. A grooving tool shall be used to produce a smooth semi-circular groove not more than
3 mm deep in all joints.
For natural stone cleaning daily cleaning read and follows manufactures instructions. The use
of a scrubber dryer machine with natural bristles, ideal for sweeping fine dust on smooth
surfaces in outside areas with clean water added to neutral soap is recommended. Stricly
forbidden to use acid, metallic,hard brush or other cleaning components.
The Subcontractor shall provide at the end of installation the following administrative and
procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, including the
following: Preparing and submitting Instruction Manuals covering the care, preservation, and
maintenance of the architectural products and finishes.
END OF SECTION

309 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31 SECTION 32 39 10 - BOLLARDS
31.1 PART 1 GENERAL
This section include Stainless Steel Bollards for Canopy and for external lighting elements
(Bollard Light) :
A. Stainless Steel Bollards for Canopy
B. Stainless Steel Bollards for external lighting elements (Bollard Light) :
order to give evidence of the compliance to the Employer Requirements and to the previous
Codes.



version:
B. Section 27 Part 5 Site Furniture

310 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not restricted to a few suppliers based on current industry levels of technology and local
building practice. Proven in use, they will not required new research, designs or
qualities. They are to be resistant to abrasion, impact, vandalism, humidity, temperature
change, sunlight and the marine atmosphere. Colour and appearance shall remain
unchanged during the life cycle of the material.
4.13.1.5 Aesthetics: Emphasis shall be laid on clear, simple use of materials and
avoidance of overstatement in design. Also to be avoided are short-lived or
ephemeral design fashions or fads, pastiche and applied ornamentation.
Stations are to provide a comfortable and controlled environment and are to be
bright, colorful and welcoming. Attempts shall be made where possible to
introduce natural lighting to enhance internal spaces.
cleaning equipment and agents. Repair and replacement with regards to the availability
of material in the region shall be considered in the selection of materials.
17

locally sourced.
b) ISO 260000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001.

17

311 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

c)Use materials with recycled content at least 10% or 20%, based on cost, of the total value
Labelling).


components.

site.
A. 01 00 00 General requirements



312 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

- ISO 14001.2004 - Environmental management systems - Requirements with
guidance for use
- ISO 9001-2000 - Quality management systems - Requirements
31.1.3 SUBMITTALS
The sign subcontractor shall submit the below list of document prior to fabrication:

b. Documentation outlining all applicable materials and the percent of
the recycle content.
d. Mock up.
requirements;
d. Cost estimates
Certification
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers specifications and descriptive literature,

installation instructions, and maintenance information.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans for each unit or groups of units, elevations with
model number, overall dimensions; construction and anchorage details.
D. Samples: Submit two sets of manufacturers available Bollard model type for
finishes.
1. Each type of bollard in specified type and finish.

313 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include component list

with the manufacturers reference numbers,descriptions of materials and procedures
for repairing and cleaning of finishes; and cleaning frequency.
A. Contractors Qualifications::
1. A specialist, who has at least 10 years successful experience performing
similar work.
2. Certification to ISO 9001 or operates an acceptable alternative quality
system.
B. Quality Benchmark Installation: Each item specified installed in location to be agreed.
C. Preconstruction Testing/Reports:
1. Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and
systems comply with the specified performance requirements.
2. Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake
testing to show compliance with the Specification at an independent testing
laboratory acceptable to the Employer's Representative.
3. The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities regarding the durability or service life
requirements, etc.
4. Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of
materials and finishes in resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands,
rings, luggage, cloth, shoes, etc.) and any other abrasion resulting from
adjacent traffic movements.
A. Deliver materials in original packages with seals unbroken and manufacturer's

labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, installation and
maintenance. Protect materials from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration and to protect from contact with soil, staining, and physical damage.
C. Handling: Handle materials carefully to avoid distorting and damage to edges and
finished surfaces.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for the

conditions affecting bollards installation.

314 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31.1.7 WARRANTY
31.2.1 DESCRIPTION
31.2.1.1 General
Bollards in this section are Stainless Steel bollards to install at Secondary Shelters' Canopies
and Stainless Steel Bollard Light as external Lighting.
Configuration as per drawings
Bollards shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips,
spacers, isolators, gaskets, electrical devices and all other accessories/components
necessary to complete the installation.
Bollards and related works shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and
maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally,
surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of construction, fabrication, detailing and
installation in accordance with the Specification. This shall include ensuring that all interfacing
requirements relating to other systems are encompassed.
Bollards could be:
31.2.1.2 Fixed or static bollard

Static Bollards forming part of a passive security barrier to enforce a stand-off measure define
a secure perimeter zone.
A. Fixed bollard with profile and configuration as indicated on the Design Drawings.
B. Material: Stainless Steel
C. Finish / Style / Size: As specified on the design Drawings.
D. Installation Method: on a previosius reinforced concrete footing (concealed) or as per

manufacturer's instructions and specified on the Design Drawings.
E. Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
F. Option:
Fixed Bollard with Light for external Lighting, including electrical works and materials
as per manufacturer's instructions and as specified on the Electrical Plant Drawings and
reports.

315 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31.2.1.3 Active bollard

Active Bollards are automated or manual retractables or removable bollards, mainly deployed
at vehicle access control points, emergency access points or vehicle entrances into
buildings.
They may be operated as follows:
a. Automatic:
Featuring a drive mechanism (pneumatic or hydraulic) that allows the bollard to
rise or lower through instructions relayed through a Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC).
b. Manual
This typically involves an operator lifting or lowering a retractable bollard by hand.
c. Removable
A bollard embedded to a particular depth by way of manual lifting trolley or by
merely removing it by hand. This type of bollard is secu secured in position byway
of a mechanical lock.
A. Active bollard with profile and configuration as indicated on the Design Drawings.
B. Material: Stainless Steel
C. Finish / Style / Size: As specified on the design Drawings.
D. Installation Method: on a previosius reinforced concrete footing (concealed) or as per

manufacturer's instructions and specified on the Design Drawings.
E. Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
F. Products shall be PAS 68 (Impact test specifications) compliant.
Data sheet to be submitted
31.2.3 TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances:
a. A high degree of accuracy shall be employed in the fabrication and
installation of the works and support structures.
b. At the time of completion, the visual requirements of the works are such that
within any planning grid section the allowable tolerances are achieved.
B. On-Site:
a. All dimensions and bollard position / configuration to be checked on Site.
b. The works shall be erected in proper alignment in relation to established
lines and grades as indicated on the Shop Drawings and account shall be
taken of the installation tolerance requirements

316 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31.3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation
tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
31.3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent

requirements are indicated..
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site bollards after paving have been completed.
C. Install site bollards level, plumb, true and securely anchored at locations indicated
on Drawings.
D. Bollard Footing: Set cast-in reinforced concrete footing as per drawing,

manufacturer's and Engineer's instructions. Verify that they are set plumb or at
correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Insert steel plates,
anchors, gussets etc at the minimum depth indicated by Engineer Calculation and
according to techical drawings.
E. For Retractable Bollard installation, reinforced concrete footing (min high 1600 mm)
include a steel cage and related added reinforcement and the hole back-filled with
30MPa concrete. In this case also a drainage hose to strormwater should be
realized
F. Keep clean site works during installations expeccially bollard steel cages from loose
material;
A. Cleaning: Upon completion remove debris and unused materials from the Site and
dispose of safely. Clean the work of dirt, splashes and excess material. Make good
adjacent surfaces marred by the execution of the work, to the acceptance of the
Employer's Representative.
B. Adjusting: Make good fastening holes and minor damage to the acceptance of the
Employer's Representative. Return items to the shop that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired on Site for refinishing or replacement.
C. Protection:
a. Do not deliver components to Site until required and do not remove
protective packaging/coverings until immediately before required for
fastening.
b. Keep components and completed work clean and dry, and adequately
protect from physical damage until Taking-Over.
D. The Subcontractor shall provide at the end of installation the following administrative
and procedural requirements for Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals,

317 / 318
Doha Metro
Major Stations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
including the following: Preparing and submitting Instruction Manuals covering the
care, preservation, and maintenance of the architectural products and finishes.
END OF SECTION

318 / 318

M007-OnW-ARC-SPE-11303-V1.0 - (Msheireb Station, Finishes Materials and Structural Works Specifications, P1.2 Secondary Shelters De)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M007-OnW-ARC-SPE-11303-V1.0 - (Msheireb Station, Finishes Materials and Structural Works Specifications, P1.2 Secondary Shelters De)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Doha Metro

Contract No: RTC/193/2016

SUBMITTAL REASON: ISSUED FOR SONO

DESIGN PHASE: P1.2 DETAIL DESIGN

DOCUMENT CODE NO. M007-ONW-ARC-SPE -11303

REVISION HISTORY& INTERNAL APPROVAL

1 Issued for SONO 18.10.2016 S. S. G.

Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 SECTION 01 11 05 - SUMMARY OF WORKS

1.1 PART 1 GENERAL

1.1.1 SECTION INCLUDE

1.1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

Form & Conditions of Contract are per Division 00.

1.1.3 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.

B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.

B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by

1. Limit conduct of noisy operations (those resulting in peak or continuous

1.1.5 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS

B. Section 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements

C. Section 01 32 05 - Construction Progress Schedule.

D. Section 01 35 05 - Health & Safety Requirements.

Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

E. Section 01 35 10 - Security Procedures.

F. Section 01 43 05- Quality assurance.

G. Section 01 51 05 - Temporary Utilities.

H. Section 01 58 13 - Temporary Project Signage.

I. Section 01 61 05 - Common product requirements.

M. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.

1.1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

ABM Architectural Branding Manual

1.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

1.3 PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 SECTION 01 31 05 - PROJECT COORDINATION

2.1 PART 1 GENERAL

2.1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

B. Site mobilization meeting.

D. Construction progress schedule.

F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

G. Number of copies of submittals.

2.1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

2.1.2.1 Qatar Construction Specification 2010 ( Qcs ) or whats equivalent in

A. Section 1 Part 6 Project Meetings

B. Section 1 Part 17 Project Co-ordination

2.1.2.2 Related Sections

A. Section 00 00 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements

B. Section 01 32 05 - Construction Progress Schedule.

D. Section 01 78 05 - Closeout Submittals.

E. Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements.

Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2.2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

2.3 PART 3 EXECUTION

2.3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.

1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

2.3.2 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING

1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

Internal ONW tracking and status-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------